Danfoss VLT HVAC FC100 Manual PDF

VLT HVAC Drive Operating Instructions
Contents
Contents
1 Introduction
1.1.1 Copyright, Limitation of Liability and Revision Rights
2 Safety
4
9
2.1.2 High Voltage Warning
2.1.4 Before Commencing Repair Work
10
2.1.5 Special Conditions
10
2.1.7 Avoid Unintended Start
11
2.1.8 Safe Stop of the Frequency Converter
11
2.1.9 IT Mains
13
3 Mechanical Installation
14
3.1 Before Starting
14
3.2.2 Mechanical Dimensions
16
4 Electrical Installation
20
4.1 How to Connect
20
4.1.2 Electrical Installation and Control Cables
21
4.1.5 Mains Wiring Overview
26
4.1.12 Motor Wiring Overview
32
4.1.20 DC Bus Connection
36
4.1.21 Brake Connection Option
37
4.1.22 Relay Connection
38
4.1.26 How to Test Motor and Direction of Rotation
41
5 Commissioning and Application Examples
47
5.1 Commissioning
47
5.1.1 Quick Menu Mode
47
5.1.5 Tips and Tricks
50
5.2 Application Examples
52
5.2.1 Start/Stop
52
5.2.2 Pulse Start/Stop
52
5.2.3 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)
53
6 How to Operate the Frequency Converter
54
6.1.2 How to Operate Graphical LCP (GLCP)
54
6.1.3 How to Operate Numeric LCP (NLCP)
58
7 How to Programme the Frequency Converter
60
7.1 How to Programme
60
7.1.1 Function Set-ups
60
MG.11.AD.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark
Contents
7.2 Commonly Used Parameters - Explanations
65
7.3.2 0-** Operation and Display
97
7.3.3 1-** Load / Motor
99
7.3.4 2-** Brakes
100
7.3.5 3-** Reference / Ramps
100
7.3.6 4-** Limits / Warnings
101
7.3.7 5-** Digital In / Out
102
7.3.8 6-** Analog In / Out
103
7.3.9 8-** Communication and Options
104
7.3.10 9-** Profibus
105
7.3.11 10-** CAN Fieldbus
106
7.3.12 11-** LonWorks
106
7.3.13 13-** Smart Logic Controller
107
7.3.14 14-** Special Functions
108
7.3.15 15-** Drive Information
109
7.3.16 16-** Data Readouts
111
7.3.17 18-** Info & Readouts
113
7.3.18 20-** FC Closed Loop
114
7.3.19 21-** Ext. Closed Loop
115
7.3.20 22-** Application Functions
117
7.3.21 23-** Time Based Funtions
119
7.3.22 24-** Application Functions 2
120
7.3.23 25-** Cascade Pack Controller
121
7.3.24 26-** Analog I / O Option MCB 109
122
8 Troubleshooting
123
8.1 Alarms and Warnings
123
8.1.1 Fault Messages
127
8.2 Acoustic Noise or Vibration
133
9 Specifications
134
9.1 General Specifications
134
9.2 Special Conditions
145
Index
147
Introduction
1 1
1 Introduction
VLT HVAC Drive
FC 100 Series
Software version: 3.4.x
This guide can be used with all VLT

HVAC Drive frequency converters
with software version 3.4.x.
The actual software version number
can be read from
par. 15-43 Software Version.
1 1
Introduction
1.1.1 Copyright, Limitation of Liability and

Revision Rights
1.1.2 Available Literature for VLT HVAC Drive
This publication contains information proprietary to Danfoss.

By accepting and using this manual the user agrees that the
information contained herein will be used solely for operating
equipment from Danfoss or equipment from other vendors
provided that such equipment is intended for communication
with Danfoss equipment over a serial communication link. This
publication is protected under the Copyright laws of Denmark
and most other countries.
Operating Instructions MG.11.Ax.yy provide the

necessary information for getting the frequency
converter up and running.
Operating Instructions VLT HVAC Drive High Power,

MG.11.Fx.yy
Design Guide MG.11.Bx.yy entails all technical

information about the frequency converter and
customer design and applications.
Danfoss does not warrant that a software program produced

according to the guidelines provided in this manual will
function properly in every physical, hardware or software
environment.
Programming Guide MG.11.Cx.yy provides information on how to programme and includes complete
parameter descriptions.
Mounting Instruction, Analog I/O Option MCB109,

MI.38.Bx.yy
Application Note, Temperature Derating Guide,

MN.11.Ax.yy
PC-based Configuration Tool MCT 10, MG.10.Ax.yy

enables the user to configure the frequency converter from a Windows based PC environment.
Danfoss VLT Energy Box software at

www.danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions then
choose PC Software Download
VLT HVAC Drive Drive Applications, MG.11.Tx.yy
Operating Instructions VLT HVAC Drive Profibus,

MG.33.Cx.yy
Operating Instructions VLT HVAC Drive Device Net,

MG.33.Dx.yy
Operating Instructions VLT HVAC Drive BACnet,

MG.11.Dx.yy
Operating Instructions VLT HVAC Drive LonWorks,

MG.11.Ex.yy
Operating Instructions VLT HVAC Drive Metasys,

MG.11.Gx.yy
Operating Instructions VLT HVAC Drive FLN,

MG.11.Zx.yy
Output Filter Design Guide, MG.90.Nx.yy
Brake Resistor Design Guide, MG.90.Ox.yy
Although Danfoss has tested and reviewed the documentation within this manual, Danfoss makes no warranty or
representation, neither expressed nor implied, with respect to
this documentation, including its quality, performance, or
fitness for a particular purpose.
In no event shall Danfoss be liable for direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential damages arising out of the use, or
the inability to use information contained in this manual, even
if advised of the possibility of such damages. In particular,
Danfoss is not responsible for any costs, including but not
limited to those incurred as a result of lost profits or revenue,
loss or damage of equipment, loss of computer programs, loss
of data, the costs to substitute these, or any claims by third
parties.
Danfoss reserves the right to revise this publication at any
time and to make changes to its contents without prior notice
or any obligation to notify former or present users of such
revisions or changes.
x = Revision number
yy = Language code
Danfoss technical literature is available in print from your local
Danfoss Sales Office or online at:
www.danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions/Documentations/Technical+Documentation.htm
Introduction
1 1
1.1.3 Abbreviations and Standards

Abbreviations:
a
AWG
Auto Tune
C
I
ILIM
IT mains
Joule
Terms:
Acceleration
I-P units:
m/s2
ft/s2
Amp
J = Nm
ft-lb, Btu
American wire gauge

Automatic Motor Tuning
Celsius
Current
Current limit
Mains supply with star point in transformer floating to
ground.
Energy
Fahrenheit
FC
Frequency Converter
SI-units:
Frequency
Hz
Hz
kHz
Kilohertz
kHz
kHz
LCP
Local Control Panel
mA
Milliampere
ms
Millisecond
min
Minute
MCT
M-TYPE
Motion Control Tool

Motor Type Dependent
Nm
Newton Metres
IM,N
Nominal motor current
fM,N
Nominal motor frequency
PM,N
Nominal motor power
UM,N
Nominal motor voltage
par.
Parameter
PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage
Watt
Power
Pascal
Pressure
IINV
RPM
in-lbs
Btu/hr, hp
Pa = N/m2
psi, psf, ft of water
Rated Inverter Output Current

Revolutions Per Minute
SR
Size Related
Temperature
Time
s,hr
TLIM
U
Torque limit
Voltage
Table 1.1: Abbreviation and standards table
1 1
Introduction
1.1.4 Frequency Converter Identification

Below is an example of an identification label. This label is
situated on the frequency converter and shows the type and
options fitted to the unit. See below for details of how to read
the Type code string (T/C).
Illustration 1.1: This example shows an identification label.
NOTE
Please have T/C (type code) number and serial number
ready before contacting Danfoss.
Introduction
1 1
1.1.5 Type Code String low and medium

power
Description
Pos
Possible choice
Product group & FC Series
1-6
FC 102
Power rating
8-10
1.1- 90 kW (P1K1 - P90K)
Number of phases
11
Three phases (T)
Mains voltage
11-12
T 2: 200-240 VAC
T 4: 380-480 VAC
T 6: 525-600 VAC
E20: IP20
E21: IP 21/NEMA Type 1
Enclosure
13-15
E55: IP 55/NEMA Type 12

E66: IP66
P21: IP21/NEMA Type 1 w/backplate
P55: IP55/NEMA Type 12 w/backplate
H1: RFI filter class A1/B
RFI filter
16-17
H2: RFI filter class A2

H3: RFI filter class A1/B (reduced cable length)
Hx: No RFI filter
Brake
18
X: No brake chopper included

B: Brake chopper included
T: Safe Stop
U: Safe + brake
G: Graphical Local Control Panel (GLCP)
Display
19
Coating PCB
20
N: Numeric Local Control Panel (NLCP)

X: No Local Control Panel
X. No coated PCB
C: Coated PCB
X: No Mains disconnect switch and Load Sharing
1: With Mains disconnect switch (IP55 only)
Mains option
21
8: Mains disconnect and Load Sharing

D: Load Sharing
See Chapter 8 for max. cable sizes.
X: Standard
Adaptation
22
Adaptation
23
Reserved
Software release
24-27
Actual software
Software language
28
0: European metric thread in cable entries.
AX: No options
A0: MCA 101 Profibus DP V1
A options
29-30
A4: MCA 104 DeviceNet

AG: MCA 108 Lonworks
AJ: MCA 109 BACnet gateway
BX: No option
B options
31-32
C0 options MCO
33-34
BK: MCB 101 General purpose I/O option

BP: MCB 105 Relay option
BO: MCB 109 Analog I/O option
CX: No options
1 1
Introduction
Description
Pos
Possible choice
C1 options
35
X: No options
C option software
36-37
XX: Standard software
D options
38-39
DX: No option
D0: DC back-up
Table 1.2: Type code description.
The various Options and Accessories are described further in the VLT HVAC Drive Design Guide, MG.11.BX.YY.
Safety
Safety Regulations
1.
The frequency converter must be disconnected from
mains if repair work is to be carried out. Check that
the mains supply has been disconnected and that
the necessary time has passed before removing
motor and mains plugs.
2 Safety
2.1.1 Symbols
Symbols used in this manual:
2.
The [STOP/RESET] key on the LCP of the frequency

converter does not disconnect the equipment from
mains and is thus not to be used as a safety switch.
3.
Correct protective earthing of the equipment must

be established, the user must be protected against
supply voltage, and the motor must be protected
against overload in accordance with applicable
national and local regulations.
4.
The earth leakage currents are higher than 3.5 mA.
5.
Protection against motor overload is set by

par. 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. If this function is
desired, set par. 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to
data value [ETR trip] (default value) or data value
[ETR warning]. Note: The function is initialized at 1.16
x rated motor current and rated motor frequency.
For the North American market: The ETR functions
provide class 20 motor overload protection in
accordance with NEC.
6.
Do not remove the plugs for the motor and mains

supply while the frequency converter is connected
to mains. Check that the mains supply has been
disconnected and that the necessary time has
passed before removing motor and mains plugs.
7.
Please note that the frequency converter has more

voltage inputs than L1, L2 and L3, when load sharing
(linking of DC intermediate circuit) and external 24 V
DC have been installed. Check that all voltage inputs
have been disconnected and that the necessary time
has passed before commencing repair work.
NOTE
Indicates something to be noted by the reader.
Indicates a general warning.
Indicates a high-voltage warning.
Indicates default setting
2.1.2 High Voltage Warning
The voltage of the frequency converter and the MCO

101 option card is dangerous whenever it is connected
to mains. Incorrect installation of the motor or frequency converter may causedeath, serious injury or damage
to the equipment. Consequently, it is essential to
comply with the instructions in this manual as well as
local and national rules and safety regulations.
2.1.3 Safety Note
The voltage of the frequency converter is dangerous

whenever connected to mains. Incorrect installation of
the motor, frequency converter or fieldbus may cause
death, serious personal injury or damage to the
equipment. Consequently, the instructions in this
manual, as well as national and local rules and safety
regulations, must be complied with.
2 2
2 2
Safety
Installation at high altitudes
Voltage
(V)
200 -
380 - 500 V, enclosure A, B and C: At altitudes above 2

km, please contact Danfoss regarding PELV.
380 - 500 V, enclosure D, E and F: At altitudes above 3
525 - 690 V: At altitudes above 2 km, please contact
Danfoss regarding PELV.
240
380 480
525 600
525 -
Min. Waiting Time (Minutes)

4
15
1.1 - 3.7
5.5 - 45
kW
1.1 - 7.5
20
40
kW
11 - 90 kW 110 - 250
kW
1.1 - 7.5
30
315 - 1000
kW
kW
11 - 90 kW
kW
11 - 90 kW
45 - 400
450 - 1400
kW
kW
690
Be aware that there may be high voltage on the DC link even when
the LEDs are turned off.
Warning against Unintended Start

1.
2.
3.
The motor can be brought to a stop by means

of digital commands, bus commands, references or a local stop, while the frequency
converter is connected to mains. If personal
safety considerations make it necessary to
ensure that no unintended start occurs, these
stop functions are not sufficient.
While parameters are being changed, the
motor may start. Consequently, the stop key
[STOP/RESET] must always be activated;
following which data can be modified.
A motor that has been stopped may start if
faults occur in the electronics of the frequency
converter, or if a temporary overload or a fault
in the supply mains or the motor connection
ceases.
2.1.4 Before Commencing Repair Work

1.
Disconnect the frequency converter from mains
2.
Disconnect DC bus terminals 88 and 89
3.
Wait at least the time mentioned in section General

Warning above
4.
Remove motor cable
2.1.5 Special Conditions

Electrical ratings:
The rating indicated on the nameplate of the frequency
converter is based on a typical 3-phase mains power supply,
within the specified voltage, current and temperature range,
which is expected to be used in most applications.
The frequency converters also support other special applications, which affect the electrical ratings of the frequency
converter.
Special conditions which affect the electrical ratings might be:
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after

the equipment has been disconnected from mains.
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been disconnected, such as external 24 V DC, load sharing (linkage of DC
intermediate circuit), as well as the motor connection for
kinetic back up. Refer to the Operating Instructions for further
safety guidelines.
The frequency converter DC link capacitors remain

charged after power has been disconnected. To avoid
an electrical shock hazard, disconnect the frequency
converter from the mains before carrying out maintenance. Wait at least as follows before doing service on
the frequency converter:
10
Single phase applications
Marine applications with more severe environmental

conditions.
High temperature applications which require derating of the electrical ratings
Other applications might also affect the electrical ratings.

Consult the relevant sections in this manual and in the VLT
HVAC Drive Design Guide, MG.11.BX.YY for information about
the electrical ratings.
Safety
Installation requirements:
The overall electrical safety of the frequency converter
requires special installation considerations regarding:
Fuses and circuit breakers for over-current and shortcircuit protection
Selection of power cables (mains, motor, brake,

loadsharing and relay)
Grid configuration (grounded delta transformer leg,

IT,TN, etc.)
Safety of low-voltage ports (PELV conditions).
Consult the relevant clauses in these instructions and in the

VLT HVAC Drive Design Guide for information about the installation requirements.
2.1.6 Installation at High Altitudes (PELV)
Hazardous Voltage!
By altitudes above 2 km, please contact Danfoss regarding PELV.
Avoid un-intended start
While the frequency converter is connected to mains,
the motor can be started/stopped using digital
commands, bus commands, references or via the LCP.
Disconnect the frequency converter from

mains whenever personal safety considerations make it necessary to avoid unintended
start.
To avoid unintended start, always activate the

[OFF] key before changing parameters.
Unless terminal 37 is turned off, an electronic

fault, temporary overload, a fault in the mains
supply, or lost motor connection may cause a
stopped motor to start.
Failure to follow recommendations could result in death

or serious injury.
2.1.7 Avoid Unintended Start
2 2
While the frequency converter is connected to mains,
the motor can be started/stopped using digital
commands, bus commands, references or via the Local
Control Panel.
Disconnect the frequency converter from

mains whenever personal safety considerations make it necessary to avoid unintended
start.
To avoid unintended start, always activate the

[OFF] key before changing parameters.
Unless terminal 37 is turned off, an electronic

fault, temporary overload, a fault in the mains
supply, or lost motor connection may cause a
stopped motor to start.
2.1.8 Safe Stop of the Frequency Converter

For versions fitted with a Safe Stop terminal 37 input, the
frequency converter can perform the safety function Safe
Torque Off (As defined by draft CD IEC 61800-5-2) or Stop
Category 0 (as defined in EN 60204-1).
It is designed and approved suitable for the requirements of
Safety Category 3 in EN 954-1. This functionality is called Safe
Stop. Prior to integration and use of Safe Stop in an installation, a thorough risk analysis on the installation must be
carried out in order to determine whether the Safe Stop
functionality and safety category are appropriate and
sufficient. In order to install and use the Safe Stop function in
accordance with the requirements of Safety Category 3 in EN
954-1, the related information and instructions of the VLT
HVAC Drive Design Guide must be followed! The information
and instructions of the Operating Instructions are not
sufficient for a correct and safe use of the Safe Stop functionality!
11
Safety
2 2
130BA491
Illustration 2.1: This certificate also covers FC 102 and FC 202.
12
Safety
2.1.9 IT Mains
2 2
IT mains
Do not connect frequency converters with RFI-filters to
mains supplies with a voltage between phase and earth
of more than 440 V for 400 V converters and 760 V for
690 V converters.
For 400 V IT mains and delta earth (grounded leg), mains
voltage may exceed 440 V between phase and earth.
For 690 V IT mains and delta earth (grounded leg), mains
Failure to follow recommendations could result in death
or serious injury.
Par. 14-50 RFI Filter can be used to disconnect the internal RFI
capacitors from the RFI filter to ground.
2.1.10 Disposal Instruction

Equipment containing electrical components must
not be disposed of together with domestic waste.
It must be separately collected with electrical and
electronic waste according to local and currently
valid legislation.
13
3 3
Mechanical Installation
3 Mechanical Installation
3.1 Before Starting
3.1.1 Checklist
When unpacking the frequency converter, ensure that the unit is undamaged and complete. Use the following table to identify
the packaging:
Enclosure
type:
A2
A3
A4
A5
(IP 20-21)
(IP 20-21)
(IP 55-66)
(IP 55-66)
1.1-2.2
3.0-3.7
1.1-2.2
1.1-3.7
B1/B3
B2/B4
C1/C3
(IP
(IP
(IP
C2*/C4
(IP
20-21-55-66)
20-21-55-66)
20-21-55-66)
20-21-55-66)
5.5-11/
15/
18.5-30/
37-45/
5.5-11
15-18.5
22-30
37-45
11-18.5/
22-30/
37-55/
75-90/
11-18.5
22-37
45-55
75-90
11-18.5/
22-30/
37-55/
75-90/
11-18.5
22-37
45-55
75-90
Unit size (kW):

200-240 V
380-480 V
1.1-4.0
525-600 V
5.5-7.5
1.1-7.5
1.1-4.0
1.1-7.5
1.1-7.5
Table 3.1: Unpacking table
Please note that a selection of screwdrivers (phillips or cross-thread screwdriver and torx), a side-cutter, drill and knife is also
recommended to have handy for unpacking and mounting the frequency converter. The packaging for these enclosures
contains, as shown: Accessories bag(s), documentation and the unit. Depending on options fitted there may be one or two bags
and one or more booklets.
14
3.2.1 Mechanical Front Views

A2
A3
A4
A5
B1
B2
3 3
IP20/21*
IP20/21*
IP55/66
IP55/66
IP21/55/66
IP21/55/66
Top and bottom mounting holes.

B3
B4
C1
C2
C3
C4
IP20/21*
IP20/21*
IP21/55/66
IP21/55/66
IP20/21*
IP20/21*
Top and bottom mounting holes. (B4+C3+C4 only)

Accessory bags containing necessary brackets, screws and connectors are included with the drives upon delivery.
* IP21 can be established with a kit as described in the section: IP 21/ IP 4X/ TYPE 1 Enclosure Kit in the Design Guide.
15
16
Back plate
Distance between mount. holes
With one C option
Back plate
Distance between mount. holes
5.3
5.5
11
8.0
220
205
70
90
130
90
350
375
372
6.6
5.5
11
8.0
220
205
110
130
170
130
257
268
374
246
7.0
5.5
11
8.0
220
205
110
130
170
130
350
375
372
Type 1
21
9.7
6.5
12
8.2
175
175
171
200
200
401
390
390
55/66
14
6.5
12
8.2
200
200
215
242
242
242
402
420
420
Type 12
55/66
1.1-7.5
1.1-4.0 1.1-7.5
1.1-2.2 1.1-3.7
A5
23
19
12
260
260
210
242
242
242
454
480
480
Type 1/12
21/ 55/66
11-18.5
11-18.5
5.5-11
B1
Mechanical Dimensions
A4
B2
27
19
12
260
260
210
242
242
242
624
650
650
Type 1/12
21/ 55/66
22-30
22-30
15
B3
12
7.9
6.8
12
262
248
140
165
205
165
380
399
419
350
Chassis
20
11-18.5
11-18.5
5.5-11
B4
23.5
15
8.5
242
242
200
231
231
231
495
520
595
460
Chassis
20
22-37
22-37
15-18.5
C1
45
9.8
9.0
19
12
310
310
272
308
308
308
648
680
680
Type 1/12
21/ 55/66
37-55
37-55
18.5-30
** The free space requirements are above and below the bare enclosure height measurement A. See section Mechanical Mounting for further information.
* Depth of enclosure will vary with different options installed.
(kg)
4.9
Max weight
5.5
Diameter
11
8.0
220
205
70
90
130
90
257
268
374
246
Diameter
Screw holes (mm)
C*
Without option A/B
With option A/B
Depth (mm)
Enclosure
Width (mm)
A2
A1
..with de-coupling plate
A**
Enclosure
Height (mm)
Chassis
Chassis
NEMA
Type 1
20
21
20
5.5-7.5
IP
1.1-4.0
380-480 V
3.0-3.7
1.1-7.5
1.1-2.2
200-240 V
A3
C2
65
9.8
9.0
19
12
335
335
334
370
370
370
739
770
770
Type 1/12
21/ 55/66
75-90
75-90
37-45
C3
35
17
8.5
333
333
270
308
308
308
521
550
630
490
Chassis
20
45-55
45-55
22-30
3 3
525-600 V
A2
Frame size (kW):
C4
50
17
8.5
333
333
330
370
370
370
631
660
800
600
Chassis
20
75-90
75-90
37-45
3.2.2 Mechanical Dimensions
Frame size B4
Frame size B3
Frame size C3
Frame sizes B1 and B2
An eight pole connector is included in accessory bag for FC 102 without Safe Stop.
1 + 2 only available in units with brake chopper. For DC link connection (Load sharing) the connector 1 can be ordered separately (Code no. 130B1064)
Frame size A5
Frame sizes A1, A2 and A3
Accessory Bags: Find the following parts included in the frequency converter accessory bags
Frame size C4
Frame sizes C1 and C2
3.2.3 Accessory Bags
3 3
17
3 3
3.2.4 Mechanical Mounting

All IP20 enclosure sizes as well as IP21/ IP55 enclosure sizes
except A2 and A3 allow side-by-side installation.
If the IP 21 Enclosure kit (130B1122 or 130B1123) is used on
enclosure A2 or A3, there must be a clearance between the
drives of min. 50 mm.
For optimal cooling conditions allow a free air passage above
and below the frequency converter. See table below.
Air passage for different enclosures

Enclo
A2
sure:
A3
A4
A5
B1
B2
B3
B4
C1
C2
C3
C4
100 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 225 200 225
Mounting frame sizes A4, A5, B1, B2, B3, B4, C1, C2, C3 and C4
on a non-solid back wall, the frequency converter must be
provided with a
backplate A due to insufficient cooling air over the heat sink.
1.
Drill holes in accordance with the measurements

given.
With heavier drives (B4, C3, C4) use a lift. First wall-mount the
2 lower bolts - then lift the drive onto the lower bolts - finally
fasten the drive against the wall with the 2 top bolts.
2.
You must provide screws suitable for the surface on

which you want to mount the frequency converter.
Re-tighten all four screws.
a
100 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 225 200 225
(mm):
b
(mm):
18
3.2.5 Safety Requirements of Mechanical

Installation
3 3
Pay attention to the requirements that apply to integration and field mounting kit. Observe the information in
the list to avoid serious injury or equipment damage,
especially when installing large units.
CAUTION!
The frequency converter is cooled by means of air
circulation.
To protect the unit from overheating, it must be ensured
that the ambient temperature does not exceed the
maximum temperature stated for the frequency converter
and that the 24-hour average temperature is not
exceeded. Locate the maximum temperature and 24hour average in the paragraph Derating for Ambient
Temperature.
If the ambient temperature is in the range of 45 C - 55
C, derating of the frequency converter will become
relevant, see Derating for Ambient Temperature.
The service life of the frequency converter is reduced if
derating for ambient temperature is not taken into
account.
3.2.6 Field Mounting

For field mounting the IP 21/IP 4X top/TYPE 1 kits or IP 54/55
units are recommended.
3.2.7 Panel Through Mounting

A Panel Through Mount Kit is available for frequency converter series VLT HVAC Drive, VLT Aqua Drive and VLT
AutomationDrive.
In order to increase heatsink cooling and reduce panel depth,
the frequency converter may be mounted in a through panel.
Furthermore the in-built fan can then be removed.
The kit is available for enclosures A5 through C2.
NOTE
This kit cannot be used with cast front covers. IP21
plastic cover must be used instead.
Information on ordering numbers is found in the Design Guide,
section Ordering Numbers.
More detailed information is available in the Panel Through
Mount Kit instruction, MI.33.HX.YY, where yy=language code.
19
4 4
Electrical Installation
NOTE
4 Electrical Installation
Cables General
All cabling must comply with national and local regulations on cable cross-sections and ambient temperature.
Copper (60/75 C) conductors are recommended.
4.1 How to Connect

4.1.1 Cables General
NOTE
For the VLT HVAC Drive High Power series mains and
motor connections, please see VLT HVAC Drive High
Power Operating Instructions MG.11.FX.YY.
Details of terminal tightening torques.
Power (kW)
Enclosure
200-240V
380-480V
Torque (Nm)
525-600
V
Mains
Motor
DC
connection
Brake
Earth
Relay
0.6
A2
1.1 - 3.0
1.1 - 4.0
1.1 - 4.0
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
A3
3.7
5.5 - 7.5
5.5 - 7.5
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
0.6
A4
1.1-2.2
1.1-4
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
0.6
A5
1.1 - 3.7
1.1 - 7.5
1.1 - 7.5
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
0.6
B1
5.5 - 11
11 - 18.5
11 - 18.5
1.8
1.8
1.5
1.5
0.6
B2
15
22
30
22
30
4.5
4.5
4.52)
4.52)
3.7
3.7
3.7
3.7
3
3
0.6
0.6
0.6
B3
5.5 - 11
11 - 18.5
11 - 18.5
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
B4
15 - 18.5
22 - 37
22 - 37
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
0.6
C1
18.5 - 30
37 - 55
37 - 55
10
10
10
10
0.6
C2
37 - 45
75 - 90
75 - 90
14/241)
14/241)
14
14
0.6
C3
22 - 30
45 - 55
45 - 55
10
10
10
10
0.6
C4
37 - 45
75 - 90
75 - 90
14/24
14
14
0.6
1)
14/24
1)
High Power
Enclo-
380-480 V
Mains
Motor
DC connection
Brake
Earth
Relay
D1/D3
110-132
19
19
9.6
9.6
19
0.6
D2/D4
160-250
19
19
9.6
9.6
19
0.6
E1/E2
315-450
19
19
19
9.6
19
0.6
F1-F33)
500-710
710-900
19
19
19
9.6
19
0.6
F2-F43)
800-1000
1000-1400
19
19
19
9.6
19
0.6
sure
Table 4.1: Tightening of terminals
1) For different cable dimensions x/y, where x 95 mm2 and y

95 mm2.
2) Cable dimensions above 18.5 kW 35 mm2 and below 22
kW 10 mm2.
20
3) For data on the F frame sizes consult FC 100 High Power

Operating Instructions.
4.1.2 Electrical Installation and Control Cables
4 4
Illustration 4.1: Diagram showing all electrical terminals. (Terminal 37 present for units with Safe Stop Function only.)
21
4 4
Terminal description
Parameter number
Factory default
1+2+3
Terminal number
Terminal 1+2+3-Relay1
5-40
No operation
4+5+6
Terminal 4+5+6-Relay2
5-40
No operation
12
Terminal 12 Supply
+24 V DC
13
Terminal 13 Supply
+24 V DC
18
Terminal 18 Digital Input
5-10
Start
19
5-11
No operation
20
Terminal 20
Common
27
Terminal 27 Digital Input/Output
5-12/5-30
Coast inverse
29
Terminal 29 Digital Input/Output
5-13/5-31
Jog
32
5-14
No operation
33
5-15
No operation
37
Safe Stop
42
Terminal 42 Analog Output
6-50
Speed 0-HighLim
53
Terminal 53 Analog Input
3-15/6-1*/20-0*
Reference
54
Terminal 54 Analog Input
3-15/6-2*/20-0*
Feedback
Table 4.2: Terminal connections
Very long control cables and analog signals may, in rare cases
and depending on installation, result in 50/60 Hz earth loops
due to noise from mains supply cables.
If this occurs, break the screen or insert a 100 nF capacitor
between screen and chassis.
NOTE
The common of digital / analog inputs and outputs
should be connected to separate common terminals 20,
39, and 55. This will avoid ground current interference
among groups. For example, it avoids switching on
digital inputs disturbing analog inputs.
NOTE
Control cables must be screened/armoured.
4.1.3 Fuses
Branch Circuit Protection
In order to protect the installation against electrical and fire
hazard, all branch circuits in an installation, switch gear,
machines etc., must be short-circuit and over-current protected according to the national/international regulations.
Short-circuit protection:
The frequency converter must be protected against
short-circuit to avoid electrical or fire hazard. Danfoss
recommends using the fuses mentioned below to
protect service personnel and equipment in case of an
internal failure in the drive. The frequency converter
provides full short-circuit protection in case of a shortcircuit on the motor output.
Over-current protection
Provide overload protection to avoid fire hazard due to
overheating of the cables in the installation. Over
current protection must always be carried out according
to national regulations. The frequency converter is
equipped with an internal over current protection that
can be used for upstream overload protection (ULapplications excluded). See par. 4-18 Current Limit in the
VLT HVAC Drive Programming Guide . Fuses must be
designed for protection in a circuit capable of supplying
a maximum of 100,000 Arms (symmetrical), 500 V/600 V
maximum.
Over-current protection
If UL/cUL is not to be complied with, Danfoss recommends
using the fuses mentioned in the table below, which will
ensure compliance with EN50178.
In case of malfunction, not following the recommendation
may result in unnecessary damage to the frequency converter.
22
Non-UL compliance fuses

Frequency
Max. fuse size
Voltage
Type
1K1-1K5
16A1
200-240 V
type gG
2K2
25A1
200-240 V
type gG
3K0
25A1
200-240 V
type gG
3K7
35A1
200-240 V
type gG
5K5
50A1
200-240 V
type gG
7K5
63A1
200-240 V
type gG
11K
63A1
200-240 V
type gG
15K
80A1
200-240 V
type gG
18K5
125A1
200-240 V
type gG
22K
125A1
200-240 V
type gG
30K
160A1
200-240 V
type gG
37K
200A1
200-240 V
type aR
45K
250A1
200-240 V
type aR
1K1-1K5
10A1
380-500 V
type gG
2K2-3K0
16A1
380-500 V
type gG
4K0-5K5
25A1
380-500 V
type gG
7K5
35A1
380-500 V
type gG
11K-15K
63A1
380-500 V
type gG
18K
63A1
380-500 V
type gG
22K
63A1
380-500 V
type gG
30K
80A1
380-500 V
type gG
37K
100A1
380-500 V
type gG
45K
125A1
380-500 V
type gG
55K
160A1
380-500 V
type gG
75K
250A1
380-500 V
type aR
90K
250A1
380-500 V
type aR
converter
200-240 V - T2
4 4
380-480 V - T4
1) Max. fuses - see national/international regulations for selecting an applicable fuse size.
Table 4.3: Non-UL fuses 200 V to 480 V
If UL/cUL is not to be complied with, we recommend using the

following fuses, which will ensure compliance with EN50178:
Frequency Converter
Voltage
Type
P110 - P250
380 - 480 V
type gG
P315 - P450
380 - 480 V
type gR
Table 4.4: Compliance with EN50178
23
UL compliance fuses
Frequency
converter
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
SIBA
Littel fuse
Type RK1
Type J
Type T
Type RK1
Type RK1
Ferraz-
Ferraz-
Shawmut
Shawmut
Type CC
Type RK1
200-240 V
kW
4 4
K25-K37
KTN-R05
JKS-05
JJN-05
5017906-005
KLN-R005
ATM-R05
A2K-05R
K55-1K1
KTN-R10
JKS-10
JJN-10
5017906-010
KLN-R10
ATM-R10
A2K-10R
1K5
KTN-R15
JKS-15
JJN-15
5017906-015
KLN-R15
ATM-R15
A2K-15R
2K2
KTN-R20
JKS-20
JJN-20
5012406-020
KLN-R20
ATM-R20
A2K-20R
3K0
KTN-R25
JKS-25
JJN-25
5012406-025
KLN-R25
ATM-R25
A2K-25R
3K7
KTN-R30
JKS-30
JJN-30
5012406-030
KLN-R30
ATM-R30
A2K-30R
5K5
KTN-R50
JKS-50
JJN-50
5012406-050
KLN-R50
A2K-50R
7K5
KTN-R50
JKS-60
JJN-60
5012406-050
KLN-R60
A2K-50R
11K
KTN-R60
JKS-60
JJN-60
5014006-063
KLN-R60
A2K-60R
A2K-60R
15K
KTN-R80
JKS-80
JJN-80
5014006-080
KLN-R80
A2K-80R
A2K-80R
18K5
KTN-R125
JKS-150
JJN-125
2028220-125
KLN-R125
A2K-125R
A2K-125R
22K
KTN-R125
JKS-150
JJN-125
2028220-125
KLN-R125
A2K-125R
A2K-125R
30K
FWX-150
2028220-150
L25S-150
A25X-150
A25X-150
37K
FWX-200
2028220-200
L25S-200
A25X-200
A25X-200
45K
FWX-250
2028220-250
L25S-250
A25X-250
A25X-250
Bussmann
Bussmann
SIBA
Littel fuse
Table 4.5: UL fuses, 200 - 240 V

Frequency
converter
Bussmann
Ferraz-
Ferraz-
Shawmut
Shawmut
Type RK1
380-480 V, 525-600 V
kW
Type RK1
Type J
Type T
Type RK1
Type RK1
Type CC
K37-1K1
KTS-R6
JKS-6
JJS-6
5017906-006
KLS-R6
ATM-R6
A6K-6R
1K5-2K2
KTS-R10
JKS-10
JJS-10
5017906-010
KLS-R10
ATM-R10
A6K-10R
3K0
KTS-R15
JKS-15
JJS-15
5017906-016
KLS-R16
ATM-R16
A6K-16R
4K0
KTS-R20
JKS-20
JJS-20
5017906-020
KLS-R20
ATM-R20
A6K-20R
5K5
KTS-R25
JKS-25
JJS-25
5017906-025
KLS-R25
ATM-R25
A6K-25R
7K5
KTS-R30
JKS-30
JJS-30
5012406-032
KLS-R30
ATM-R30
A6K-30R
11K
KTS-R40
JKS-40
JJS-40
5014006-040
KLS-R40
A6K-40R
15K
KTS-R40
JKS-40
JJS-40
5014006-040
KLS-R40
A6K-40R
18K
KTS-R50
JKS-50
JJS-50
5014006-050
KLS-R50
A6K-50R
22K
KTS-R60
JKS-60
JJS-60
5014006-063
KLS-R60
A6K-60R
30K
KTS-R80
JKS-80
JJS-80
2028220-100
KLS-R80
37K
KTS-R100
JKS-100
JJS-100
2028220-125
KLS-R100
A6K-100R
A6K-80R
45K
KTS-R125
JKS-150
JJS-150
2028220-125
KLS-R125
A6K-125R
55K
KTS-R150
JKS-150
JJS-150
2028220-160
KLS-R150
A6K-150R
75K
FWH-220
2028220-200
L50S-225
A50-P225
90K
FWH-250
2028220-250
L50S-250
A50-P250
Table 4.6: UL fuses, 380 - 600 V
KTS-fuses from Bussmann may substitute KTN for

240 V frequency converters.
A6KR fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute

A2KR for 240 V frequency converters.
FWH-fuses from Bussmann may substitute FWX for

240 V frequency converters.
A50X fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute

A25X for 240 V frequency converters.
KLSR fuses from LITTEL FUSE may substitute KLNR

fuses for 240 V frequency converters.
L50S fuses from LITTEL FUSE may substitute L50S
fuses for 240 V frequency converters.
24
4.1.4 Earthing and IT Mains
The earth connection cable cross section must be at

least 10 mm2 or 2 rated mains wires terminated
separately according to EN 50178 or IEC 61800-5-1 unless
national regulations specify differently. Always comply
with national and local regulations. on cable crosssections.
4 4
The mains is connected to the main disconnect switch if this is

included.
Check that mains voltage corresponds to the mains

voltage of the frequency converter name plate.
Illustration 4.2: Terminals for mains and earthing.
IT Mains
Do not connect 400 V frequency converters with RFIfilters to mains supplies with a voltage between phase
and earth of more than 440 V.
For IT mains and delta earth (grounded leg), mains
25
4.1.5 Mains Wiring Overview

Enclosure:
A2
A3
A4
A5
B1
B2
(IP 20/IP 21)
(IP 20/IP 21)
(IP 55/IP 66)
(IP 55/IP 66)
(IP 21/IP 55/IP 66)
(IP 21/IP 55/IP 66)
200-240 V
1.1-3.0
kW
3.7
kW
1.1-2.2 kW
1.1-3.7
kW
5.5-11
kW
15
kW
380-480 V
1.1-4.0
kW
5.5-7.5
kW
1.1-.4 kW
1.1-7.5
kW
11-18.5
kW
22-30
kW
1.1-7.5
1.1-7.5
11-18.5
22-30
kW
kW
kW
kW
4 4
Motor size:
525-600 V
Enclosure:
B3
B4
C1
C2
C3
C4
(IP 20)
(IP 20)
(IP 21/IP 55/66)
(IP 21/IP 55/66)
(IP 20)
(IP20)
4.1.6
4.1.6
Goto:
4.1.5
4.1.7
Motor size:
200-240 V
380-480 V
525-600 V
5.5-11
15-18.5
18.5-30
37-45
22-30
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
11-18.5
22-37
37-55
75-90
45-55
75-90
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
11-18.5
22-37
37-55
75-90
45-55
75-90
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
Goto:
4.1.8
Table 4.7: Mains wiring table.
26
37-45
4.1.9
4.1.6 Mains Connection for A2 and A3

The earth connection cable cross section must be at
least 10 mm2 or 2 rated mains wires terminated
separately according to EN 50178/IEC 61800-5-1.
4 4
Illustration 4.3: First mount the two screws on the
Illustration 4.5: Then mount mains plug and tighten wires.
mounting plate, slide it into place and tighten fully.
Illustration 4.6: Finally tighten support bracket on mains

wires.
Illustration 4.4: When mounting cables, first mount and

tighten earth cable.
27
NOTE
4.1.8 Mains Connection for B1, B2 and B3
With single phase A3 use L1 and L2 terminals.
4.1.7 Mains Connection for A4/A5
4 4
Illustration 4.7: How to connect to mains and earthing

without mains disconnect switch. Note that a cable clamp
is used.
Illustration 4.9: How to connect to mains and earthing for

B1 and B2

with mains disconnect switch.
NOTE
With single phase A5 use L1 and L2 terminals.

for B3 without RFI.
28
4.1.9 Mains Connection for B4, C1 and C2
4 4

for B3 with RFI.
NOTE
With single phase B1 use L1 and L2 terminals.

for B4.
NOTE
For correct cable dimensions please see the section
General Specifications at the back of this manual.
29
4.1.10 Mains Connection for C3 and C4
4 4

for C1 and C2.
Illustration 4.14: How to connect C3 to mains and
earthing.
Illustration 4.15: How to connect C4 to mains and

earthing.
30
4.1.11 How to Connect Motor - Introduction

See section General Specifications for correct dimensioning of
motor cable cross-section and length.
Use a screened/armoured motor cable to comply

with EMC emission specifications (or install the cable
in metal conduit).
Keep the motor cable as short as possible to reduce

the noise level and leakage currents.
Connect the motor cable screen/armour to both the

decoupling plate of the frequency converter and to
the metal of the motor. (Same applies to both ends
of metal conduit if used instead of screen.)
Make the screen connections with the largest

possible surface area (cable clamp or by using an
EMC cable gland). This is done by using the supplied
installation devices in the frequency converter.
Avoid terminating the screen by twisting the ends

(pigtails), as this will spoil high frequency screening
effects.
If it is necessary to break the continuity of the screen

to install a motor isolator or motor relay, the continuity must be maintained with the lowest possible HF
impedance.
Cable length and cross-section

The frequency converter has been tested with a given length
of cable and a given cross-section of that cable. If the crosssection is increased, the cable capacitance - and thus the
leakage current - may increase, and the cable length must be
reduced correspondingly.
Furthermore, the terminal screw must be retightened after

two days due to the softness of the aluminium. It is crucial to
ensure the connection makes a gas tight joint, otherwise the
aluminium surface will oxidize again.
All types of three-phase asynchronous standard motors can be
connected to the frequency converter. Normally, small motors
are star-connected (230/400 V, D/Y). Large motors are deltaconnected (400/690 V, D/Y). Refer to the motor name plate for
correct connection mode and voltage.
Illustration 4.16: Terminals for motor connection
CAUTION!
In motors without phase insulation paper or other
insulation reinforcement suitable for operation with
voltage supply (such as a frequency converter), fit a sinewave filter on the output of the frequency converter.
(Motors that comply with IEC 60034-17 do not require a
Sine-wave filter).
No.
Switching frequency
When frequency converters are used together with sine wave
filters to reduce the acoustic noise from a motor, the switching
frequency must be set according to the sine wave filter
instruction in par. 14-01 Switching Frequency.
Precautions while using Aluminium conductors
Aluminium conductors are not recommended for cable cross
sections below 35 mm2. Terminals can accept aluminium
conductors but the conductor surface has to be clean and the
oxidation must be removed and sealed by neutral acid free
Vaseline grease before the conductor is connected.
96
97
98
Motor voltage 0-100% of mains voltage.
3 cables out of motor
U1
V1
W1
W2
U2
V2
U1
V1
W1 6 cables out of motor, Star-connected
6 cables out of motor, Delta-connected
U2, V2, W2 to be interconnected separately

(optional terminal block)
No.
99
Earth connection
PE
Table 4.8: 3 and 6 cable motor connection.
31
4 4
4.1.12 Motor Wiring Overview

Enclosure:
A2
A3
A4
A5
(IP 20/IP 21)
(IP 20/IP 21)
(IP 55/IP 66)
(IP 55/IP 66)
B1
B2
(IP 21/IP 55/
(IP 21/IP 55/
IP 66)
IP 66)
4 4
Motor size:
200-240 V
380-480 V
1.1-3.0
3.7
kW
kW
1.1-4.0
5.5-7.5
kW
kW
1.1-4 kW
1.1-7.5
525-600 V
kW
Goto:
Enclosure:
1.1-2.2 kW
4.1.12
1.1-3.7
5.5-11
15
kW
kW
kW
1.1-7.5
11-18.5
22-30
kW
kW
kW
1.1-7.5
11-18.5
22-30
kW
kW
4.1.13
4.1.13
kW
4.1.14
B3
(IP 20)
B4
(IP 20)
C1
(IP 21/IP 55/66)
C2
(IP 21/IP 55/66)
C3
(IP 20)
C4
(IP20)
5.5-11
15-18.5
18.5-30
37-45
22-30
37-45
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
11-18.5
22-37
37-55
75-90
45-55
75-90
Motor size:
200-240 V
380-480 V
525-600 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
11-18.5
kW
22-37
kW
37-55
kW
75-90
kW
45-55
kW
75-90
kW
Goto:
4.1.15
4.1.16
Table 4.9: Motor wiring table.
32
4.1.17
4.1.13 Motor Connection for A2 and A3

Follow these drawings step by step for connecting the motor
to the frequency converter.
4 4
Illustration 4.18: Mount cable clamp to ensure 360 degree

connection between chassis and screen, note the outer
insulation of the motor cable is removed under the clamp.
4.1.14 Motor Connection for A4/A5
Illustration 4.17: First terminate the motor earth, then

place motor U, V and W wires in plug and tighten.
Illustration 4.19: First terminate the motor earth, then

place motor U, V and W wires in terminal and tighten.
Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable
is removed under the EMC clamp.
33
4.1.15 Motor Connection for B1 and B2
First terminate the motor earth, then Place motor U, V and W

wires in terminal and tighten. Please ensure that the outer
insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC
clamp.
4 4

clamp.
4.1.16 Motor Connection for B3 and B4

clamp.
34
4.1.17 Motor Connection for C1 and C2
4 4

clamp.
4.1.18 Motor Connection for C3 and C4
First terminate the motor earth, then place motor U, V and W

wires into the appropriate terminals and tighten. Please
ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed
under the EMC clamp.
4.1.19 Wiring Example and Testing

The following section describes how to terminate control
wires and how to access them. For an explanation of the
function, programming and wiring of the control terminals,
please see chapter, How to programme the frequency converter.
First terminate the motor earth, then place motor U, V and W

wires into the appropriate terminals and tighten. Please
ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed
under the EMC clamp.
35
4.1.20 DC Bus Connection

The DC bus terminal is used for DC back-up, with the
intermediate circuit being supplied from an external source.
Terminal number 88 and 89 are used.
4 4
Illustration 4.21: DC bus connections for enclosure B4.
Illustration 4.20: DC bus connections for enclosure B3.
Illustration 4.22: DC bus connections for enclosure C3.
36
4 4
Illustration 4.24: Brake connection terminal for B3.
Illustration 4.23: DC bus connections for enclosure C4.
Please contact Danfoss if you require further information.
4.1.21 Brake Connection Option

The connection cable to the brake resistor must be screened/
armoured.
Brake resistor
Terminal number
81
82
Terminals
R-
R+
Dynamic brake calls for extra equipment and safety

considerations. For further information, please contact
Danfoss.
1.
Use cable clamps to connect the screen to the metal

cabinet of the frequency converter and to the
decoupling plate of the brake resistor.
2.
Dimension the cross-section of the brake cable to

match the brake current.
Illustration 4.25: Brake connection terminal for B4.
Voltages up to 975 V DC (@ 600 V AC) may occur

between the terminals.
37
If a short circuit in the brake IGBT occurs, prevent power

dissipation in the brake resistor by using a mains switch
or contactor to disconnect the mains for the frequency
converter. Only the frequency converter shall control
the contactor.
4 4
Place the brake resistor in an environment free of fire
risk and ensure that no external objects can fall into the
brake resistor through ventilation slots.
Do not cover ventilation slots and grids.
4.1.22 Relay Connection

To set relay output, see par. group 5-4* Relays.
Illustration 4.26: Brake connection terminal for C3.
No.
01 - 02
make (normally open)
01 - 03
break (normally closed)
04 - 05
make (normally open)
04 - 06
break (normally closed)
Illustration 4.27: Brake connection terminal for C4.
38
4 4
Terminals for relay connection
Terminals for relay connection
(A2 and A3 enclosures).
(A4, A5, B1 and B2 enclosures).
Illustration 4.29: Terminals for relay connections for B3.

Only one relay input is fitted from the factory. When the
second relay is needed remove knock-out.
Illustration 4.28: Terminals for relay connection (C1 and C2

enclosures).
The relay connections are shown in the cut-out with relay
plugs (from the Accessory Bag) fitted.
39
Relay 1 and relay 2 are programmed in par. 5-40 Function

Relay, par. 5-41 On Delay, Relay, and par. 5-42 Off Delay,
Relay.
Additional relay outputs by using option module MCB 105.
4 4
Illustration 4.30: Terminals for relay connections for B4.
Illustration 4.31: Terminals for relay connections for C3

and C4. Located in the upper right corner of the frequency converter.
4.1.23 Relay Output

Relay 1
Terminal 01: common

Terminal 02: normal open 240 V AC
Terminal 03: normal closed 240 V AC
Relay 2
40
Terminal 04: common

Terminal 05: normal open 400 V AC
Terminal 06: normal closed 240 V AC
4.1.24 Access to Control Terminals

All terminals to the control cables are located underneath the
terminal cover on the front of the frequency converter.
Remove the terminal cover with a screwdriver.
4.1.25 Control Terminals

Drawing reference numbers:
1.
10-pole plug digital I/O.
2.
3-pole plug RS-485 Bus.
3.
6-pole analog I/O.
4.
USB connection.
4 4
Illustration 4.32: Access to control terminals for A2, A3, B3,

B4, C3 and C4 enclosures
Remove front-cover to access control terminals. When replacing the front-cover, please ensure proper fastening by
applying a torque of 2 Nm.
Illustration 4.34: Control terminals (all enclosures)
4.1.26 How to Test Motor and Direction of

Rotation
Note that unintended motor start can occur, ensure no

personnel or equipment is in danger!
Illustration 4.33: Access to control terminals for A4, A5, B1,
B2, C1 and C2 enclosures
Please follow these steps to test the motor connection and

direction of rotation. Start with no power to the unit.
41
4 4
Illustration 4.35:
Step 1: First remove the insulation on both ends of a 50 to
70 mm piece of wire.
Illustration 4.38:
Step 4: Power-up the unit and press the [Off] button. In
this state the motor should not rotate. Press [Off] to stop
the motor at any time. Note the LED at the [OFF] button
should be lit. If alarms or warnings are flashing, please see
Illustration 4.36:
Step 2: Insert one end in terminal 27 using a suitable
chapter 7 regarding these.
terminal screwdriver. (Note: For units with Safe Stop

function, the existing jumper between terminal 12 and 37
should not be removed for the unit to be able to run!)
Illustration 4.37:
Step 3: Insert the other end in terminal 12 or 13. (Note: For
units with Safe Stop function, the existing jumper
between terminal 12 and 37 should not be removed for
the unit to be able to run!)
Illustration 4.39:
Step 5: By pressing the [Hand on] button, the LED above
the button should be lit and the motor may rotate.
42
4 4
Illustration 4.40:
Step 6: The speed of the motor can be seen in the LCP. It
can be adjusted by pushing the up and down
arrow
buttons.
Illustration 4.42:
Step 8: Press the [Off] button to stop the motor again.
Illustration 4.43:
Illustration 4.41:
Step 9: Change two motor wires if the desired rotation of
Step 7: To move the cursor, use the left and right
direction is not achieved.
arrow buttons. This enables changing the speed in larger

increments.
Remove mains power from the frequency converter

before changing motor wires.
43
4 4
4.1.27 Switches S201, S202, and S801

Switches S201 (Al 53) and S202 (Al 54) are used to select a
current (0-20 mA) or a voltage (0 to 10 V) configuration of the
analog input terminals 53 and 54 respectively.
Switch S801 (BUS TER.) can be used to enable termination on
the RS-485 port (terminals 68 and 69).
Please note that the switches may be covered by an option, if
fitted.
Default setting:
S201 (AI 53) = OFF (voltage input)
S202 (AI 54) = OFF (voltage input)
S801 (Bus termination) = OFF
Illustration 4.44: Switches location.
44
4.2 Final Optimisation and Test

To optimise motor shaft performance and optimise the
frequency converter for the connected motor and installation,
please follow these steps. Ensure that frequency converter
and motor are connected and that power is applied to
frequency converter.
Before power up ensure that connected equipment is

ready for use.
Step 1: Locate motor name plate
NOTE
The motor is either star- (Y) or deltaconnected (). This
information is located on the motor name plate data.
Step 2: Enter motor name plate data in following parameter

list
To access list first press [QUICK MENU] key then select Q2
Quick Setup.
1.
Par. 1-20 Motor Power [kW]

Par. 1-21 Motor Power [HP]
2.
Par. 1-22 Motor Voltage
3.
Par. 1-23 Motor Frequency
4.
Par. 1-24 Motor Current
5.
Par. 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed
4 4
Table 4.10: Motor related parameters
Step 3: Activate Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)Activate

Auto Tune
Performing AMA ensures best possible performance. AMA
automatically takes measurements from the specific motor
connected and compensates for installation variances.
1.
Connect terminal 27 to terminal 12 or use [QUICK

MENU] and "Q2 Quick Setup" and set Terminal 27
par. 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input to No function [0]
2.
Press [QUICK MENU], select "Q3 Function Setups",

select "Q3-1 General Settings", select "Q3-10 Adv.
Motor Settings" and scroll down to
par. 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)
Automatic Motor Adaption.
3.
Press [OK] to activate the AMA par. 1-29 Automatic

Motor Adaptation (AMA).
4.
Choose between complete or reduced AMA. If sine

wave filter is mounted, run only reduced AMA, or
remove sine wave filter during AMA procedure.
5.
Press [OK] key. Display should show Press [Hand on]

to start.
6.
Press [Hand on] key. A progress bar indicates if AMA

is in progress.
Stop the AMA during operation

1.
Press the [OFF] key - the frequency converter enters

into alarm mode and the display shows that the
AMA was terminated by the user.
Successful AMA
1.
The display shows Press [OK] to finish AMA.
2.
Press the [OK] key to exit the AMA state.
Illustration 4.45: Motor name plate example
45
NOTE
Unsuccessful AMA
4 4
1.
The frequency converter enters into alarm mode. A

description of the alarm can be found in the Troubleshooting section.
2.
"Report Value in the [Alarm Log] shows the last

measuring sequence carried out by the AMA, before
the frequency converter entered alarm mode. This
number along with the description of the alarm will
assist troubleshooting. If contacting Danfoss Service,
make sure to mention number and alarm description.
Unsuccessful AMA is often caused by incorrectly entered

motor name plate data or too big difference between
the motor power size and the frequency converter
power size.
Step 4: Set speed limit and ramp time
Set up the desired limits for speed and ramp time.
Par. 3-02 Minimum Reference

Par. 3-03 Maximum Reference
Par. 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par. 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
Par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or par. 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
Par. 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time Ramp-up Time 1 [s]
Par. 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time Ramp-down Time 1 [s]
See the section How to programme the frequency converter,

Quick Menu Mode for an easy set-up of these parameters.
46
Commissioning and Applicati...
5 Commissioning and Application

Examples
5.1 Commissioning
5.1.1 Quick Menu Mode
Parameter Data
The graphical display (GLCP) provides access to all parameters
listed under the Quick Menus. The numeric display (NLCP) only
provides access to the Quick Setup parameters. To set parameters using the [Quick Menu] button - enter or change parameter data or settings in accordance with the following
procedure:
Select [My Personal Menu] to display personal parameters:

For example, an AHU or pump OEM may have pre-programmed personal parameters to be in My Personal Menu during
factory commissioning to make on-site commissioning/fine
tuning simpler. These parameters are selected in par. 0-25 My
Personal Menu. Up to 20 different parameters can be programmed in this menu.
Select [Changes Made] to get information about:
The last 10 changes. Use the up/down navigation
keys to scroll between the last 10 changed parameters.
The changes made since default setting.
Select [Loggings]:
to get information about the display line read-outs. The
information is shown as graphs.
Only display parameters selected in par. 0-20 Display Line 1.1
Small and par. 0-24 Display Line 3 Large can be viewed. It is
possible to store up to 120 samples in the memory for later
reference.
1.
Press Quick Menu button
2.
Use the [] and [] buttons to find the parameter

you want to change
3.
Press [OK]
4.
Use [] and [] buttons to select the correct parameter setting
5.
Press [OK]
6.
To move to a different digit within a parameter

setting, use the [] and [] buttons
7.
Highlighted area indicates digit selected for change
Efficient Parameter Set-up for VLT HVAC Drive Applications:

The parameters can easily be set up for the vast majority of
the VLT HVAC Drive applications only by using the [Quick
Setup] option.
After pressing [Quick Menu], the different choices in the Quick
Menu are listed. See also illustration 6.1 below and tables Q3-1
to Q3-4 in the followingFunction Setups section.
8.
Press [Cancel] button to disregard change, or press

[OK] to accept change and enter the new setting
Example of using the Quick Setup option:

Assume you want to set the Ramp Down Time to 100 seconds:
Example of changing parameter data

Assume parameter 22-60 is set to [Off]. However, you want to
monitor the fan-belt condition - non- broken or broken according to the following procedure:
1.
Press Quick Menu key
2.
Choose Function Setups with the [] button
3.
Press [OK]
4.
Choose Application Settings with the [] button
5.
Press [OK]
6.
Press [OK] again for Fan Functions
7.
Choose Broken Belt Function by pressing [OK]
8.
With [] button, choose [2] Trip
The frequency converter will now trip if a broken fan-belt is

detected.
Quick Setup
1.
Select [Quick Setup]. The first par. 0-01 Language in

Quick Setup appears
2.
Press [] repeatedly until par. 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp

Down Time appears with the default setting of 20
seconds
3.
Press [OK]
4.
Use the [] button to highlight the 3rd digit before

the comma
5.
Change '0' to '1' by using the [] button
6.
Use the [] button to highlight the digit '2'
7.
Change '2' to '0' with the [] button
8.
Press [OK]
The new ramp-down time is now set to 100 seconds.

It is recommended to do the set-up in the order listed.
47
5 5
NOTE
A complete description of the function is found in the
parameter sections of this manual.
** Par. 5-40 Function Relay, is an array, where one may choose

between Relay1 [0] or Relay2 [1]. Standard setting is Relay1 [0]
with the default choice Alarm [9].
See the parameter description in the section Commonly Used
Parameters.
For a detailed information about settings and programming,
please see the VLT HVAC Drive Programming Guide, MG.
11.CX.YY
x=version number
y=language
Illustration 5.1: Quick Menu view.
5 5
NOTE
The Quick Setup menu gives access to the 18 most important
setup parameters of the frequency converter. After programming the frequency converter will, in most cases, be ready for
operation. The 18 Quick Setup parameters are shown in the
table below. A complete description of the function is given in
the parameter description sections of this manual.
Parameter
[Units]
[kW]
Par. 1-21 Motor Power [HP]
[HP]
Par. 1-22 Motor Voltage*
[V]
Par. 1-23 Motor Frequency
[Hz]
Par. 1-24 Motor Current
[A]
5.1.2 RS-485 Bus Connection

One or more frequency converters can be connected to a
controller (or master) using the RS-485 standard interface.
Terminal 68 is connected to the P signal (TX+, RX+), while
terminal 69 is connected to the N signal (TX-,RX-).
Par. 0-01 Language

Par. 1-20 Motor Power [kW]
If [No Operation] is selected in par. 5-12 Terminal 27

Digital Input, no connection to +24 V on terminal 27 is
necessary to enable start.
If [Coast Inverse] (factory default value) is selected in
par. 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input, a connection to +24V
is necessary to enable start.
If more than one frequency converter is connected to a

master, use parallel connections.
Par. 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed [RPM]

Par. 1-28 Motor Rotation Check [Hz]
Par. 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time [s]
Par. 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down
[s]
Time
Par. 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
[RPM]
Par. 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
[Hz]*
Par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
[RPM]
Illustration 5.2: Connection example.
Par. 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

[Hz]*
Par. 3-19 Jog Speed [RPM]
[RPM]
Par. 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]*
[Hz]
In order to avoid potential equalizing currents in the screen,

earth the cable screen via terminal 61, which is connected to
the frame via an RC-link.
Par. 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital

Input
Par. 5-40 Function Relay**
Table 5.1: Quick Setup parameters
*The display showing depends on choices made in

par. 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and par. 0-03 Regional Settings. The
default settings of par. 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and
par. 0-03 Regional Settings depend on which region of the
world the frequency converter is supplied to but can be reprogrammed as required.
48
Bus termination
The RS-485 bus must be terminated by a resistor network at
both ends. If the drive is the first or the last device in the
RS-485 loop, set the switch S801 on the control card for ON.
For more information, see the paragraph Switches S201, S202,
and S801.
5.1.3 How to Connect a PC to the Frequency

Converter
To control or program the frequency converter from a PC,
install the PC-based Configuration Tool MCT 10.
The PC is connected via a standard (host/device) USB cable, or
via the RS-485 interface as shown in the VLT HVAC Drive
Design Guide, chapter How to Install > Installation of misc.
connections.
NOTE
The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the
supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
The USB connection is connected to protection earth on
the frequency converter. Use only an isolated laptop as
PC connection to the USB connector on the frequency
converter.
Planning a communication network off-line. MCT 10

contains a complete frequency converter database
Commissioning frequency converters on line
Expanding an existing network
Saving settings for all frequency converters

Replacing a frequency converter in a network
Simple and accurate documentation of frequency
converter settings after commissioning.
Future developed frequency converters will be

supported
5 5
MCT 10 set-up software supports Profibus DP-V1 via a Master

class 2 connection. It makes it possible to on line read/write
parameters in a frequency converter via the Profibus network.
This will eliminate the need for an extra communication
network.
Illustration 5.3: For control cable connections, see section

on Control Terminals.
5.1.4 PC Software Tools

PC-based Configuration Tool MCT 10
All Frequency converters are equipped with a serial communication port. Danfoss provides a PC tool for communication
between PC and frequency converter, PC-based Configuration
Tool MCT 10. Please check the section on Available Literature
for detailed information on this tool.
MCT 10 set-up software
MCT 10 has been designed as an easy to use interactive tool
for setting parameters in our frequency converters. The
software can be downloaded from the Danfoss internet site
http://www.Danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions/
Softwaredownload/DDPC+Software+Program.htm.
The MCT 10 set-up software will be useful for:
49
5 5
Save frequency converter settings:

1.
Connect a PC to the unit via USB com port. (NOTE:

Use a PC, which is isolated from the mains, in
conjunction with the USB port. Failure to do so may
damage equipment.)
2.
Open MCT 10 Set-up Software
3.
Choose Read from drive
4.
Choose Save as
1.
Connect a PC to the frequency converter via USB

com port
2.
Open MCT 10 Set-up software
3.
Choose Open stored files will be shown
4.
Open the appropriate file
5.
Choose Write to drive
All parameter settings are now transferred to the frequency

converter.
All parameters are now stored in the PC.

A separate manual for MCT 10 Set-up Software is available:
MG.10.Rx.yy.
Load frequency converter settings:

The MCT 10 Set-up software modules
The following modules are included in the software package:
MCT Set-up 10 Software
Setting parameters
Copy to and from frequency converters

Documentation and print out of parameter settings incl. diagrams
Ext. user interface
Preventive Maintenance Schedule
Clock settings
Timed Action Programming
Smart Logic Controller Set-up
Ordering number:
Please order the CD containing MCT 10 Set-up Software using
code number 130B1000.
MCT 10 can also be downloaded from the Danfoss Internet:
WWW.DANFOSS.COM, Business Area: Motion Controls.
5.1.6 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings

when Using GLCP
Once the set-up of a frequency converter is complete, it is
recommended to store (backup) the parameter settings in the
GLCP or on a PC via MCT 10 Set-up Software Tool.
5.1.5 Tips and Tricks
50
For the majority of HVAC applications the Quick

Menu, Quick Set-up and Function Set-up provides
the simplest and quickest access to all the typical
parameters required
Whenever possible, performing an AMA, will ensure

best shaft performance
Contrast of the display can be adjusted by pressing

[Status] and [] for darker display or by pressing
[Status] and [] for brighter display
Under [Quick Menu] and [Changes Made] all parameters that have been changed from factory settings
are displayed
Press and hold [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds for

access to any parameter
For service purposes it is recommended to copy all

parameters to the LCP, see par. 0-50 LCP Copy for
further information
Stop the motor before performing any of these

operations.
Data storage in LCP:
1.
Go to par. 0-50 LCP Copy
2.
Press the [OK] key
3.
Select All to LCP
4.
Press the [OK] key
All parameter settings are now stored in the GLCP indicated

by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].
The GLCP can now be connected to another frequency
converter and the parameter settings copied to this frequency
converter.
Data transfer from LCP to Frequency converter:

1.
Go to par. 0-50 LCP Copy
2.
Press the [OK] key
3.
Select All from LCP
4.
Press the [OK] key
1. Disconnect from mains and wait until the display

turns off.
2a. Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at the same
time while power up for Graphical LCP (GLCP)
2b. Press [Menu] while power up for LCP 101,
Numerical Display
The parameter settings stored in the GLCP are now transferred

to the frequency converter indicated by the progress bar.
When 100% is reached, press [OK].
5.1.7 Initialisation to Default Settings

There are two ways to initialise the frequency converter to
default: Recommended initialisation and manual initialisation.
Please be aware that they have different impact according to
the below description.
3. Release the keys after 5 s

4. The frequency converter is now programmed
according to default settings
This parameter initialises all except:
5 5
Par. 15-00 Operating Hours

Par. 15-03 Power Up's
Par. 15-04 Over Temp's
Par. 15-05 Over Volt's
Recommended initialisation (via par. 14-22 Operation Mode)

1.
Select par. 14-22 Operation Mode
2.
Press [OK]
3.
Select Initialisation (for NLCP select 2)
4.
Press [OK]
5.
Remove power to unit and wait for display to turn

off.
6.
Reconnect power and the frequency converter is

reset. Note that first start-up takes a few more
seconds
7.
Press [Reset]
Par. 14-22 Operation Mode initialises all except:

Par. 14-50 RFI Filter
Par. 8-30 Protocol
Par. 8-31 Address
Par. 8-32 Baud Rate
Par. 8-35 Minimum Response Delay
Par. 8-36 Max Response Delay
Par. 8-37 Maximum Inter-Char Delay
Par. 15-00 Operating Hours to par. 15-05 Over Volt's
Par. 15-20 Historic Log: Event to par. 15-22 Historic Log: Time
Par. 15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code to par. 15-32 Alarm Log: Time
NOTE
Parameters selected in par. 0-25 My Personal Menu, will
stay present, with default factory setting.
Manual initialisation
NOTE
When carrying out manual initialisation, serial communication, RFI filter settings and fault log settings are reset.
Removes parameters selected in par. 0-25 My Personal
Menu.
51
5.2.2 Pulse Start/Stop
5.2 Application Examples

5.2.1 Start/Stop
Terminal 18 = start/stop par. 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8]
Start
Terminal 27 = No operation par. 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
[0] No operation (Default coast inverse
Terminal 18 = start/stop par. 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9]

Latched start
Terminal 27= Stop par. 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [6] Stop
inverse
Par. 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input = Latched start
Par. 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input = Stop inverse
Par. 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input = Start (default)
5 5
Par. 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input = coast inverse

(default)
Illustration 5.4: Terminal 37: Available only with Safe Stop

Function!
Illustration 5.5: Terminal 37: Available only with Safe Stop

Function!
52
5.2.3 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

AMA is an algorithm to measure the electrical motor parameters on a motor at standstill. This means that AMA itself does
not supply any torque.
AMA is useful when commissioning systems and optimising
the adjustment of the frequency converter to the applied
motor. This feature is particularly used where the default
setting does not apply to the connected motor.
Par. 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) allows a choice of
complete AMA with determination of all electrical motor
parameters or reduced AMA with determination of the stator
resistance Rs only.
The duration of a total AMA varies from a few minutes on
small motors to more than 15 minutes on large motors.
5 5
Limitations and preconditions:

For the AMA to determine the motor parameters
optimally, enter the correct motor nameplate data in
par. 1-20 Motor Power [kW] to par. 1-28 Motor
Rotation Check.
For the best adjustment of the frequency converter,

carry out AMA on a cold motor. Repeated AMA runs
may lead to a heating of the motor, which results in
an increase of the stator resistance, Rs. Normally, this
is not critical.
AMA can only be carried out if the rated motor

current is minimum 35% of the rated output current
of the frequency converter. AMA can be carried out
on up to one oversize motor.
It is possible to carry out a reduced AMA test with a

Sine-wave filter installed. Avoid carrying out a
complete AMA with a Sine-wave filter. If an overall
setting is required, remove the Sine-wave filter while
running a total AMA. After completion of the AMA,
reinsert the Sine-wave filter.
If motors are coupled in parallel, use only reduced

AMA if any.
Avoid running a complete AMA when using synchronous motors. If synchronous motors are applied, run
a reduced AMA and manually set the extended
motor data. The AMA function does not apply to
permanent magnet motors.
The frequency converter does not produce motor

torque during an AMA. During an AMA, it is imperative that the application does not force the motor
shaft to run, which is known to happen with e.g.
wind milling in ventilation systems. This disturbs the
AMA function.
53
6 6
How to Operate the Frequenc...
6 How to Operate the Frequency

Converter
6.1.1 Three Ways of Operating
The frequency converter can be operated in three ways:
1.
Graphical Local Control Panel (GLCP), see 5.1.2
2.
Numeric Local Control Panel (NLCP), see 5.1.3
3.
RS-485 serial communication or USB, both for PC

connection, see 5.1.4
If the frequency converter is fitted with fieldbus option, please

refer to relevant documentation.
6.1.2 How to Operate Graphical LCP (GLCP)

The following instructions are valid for the GLCP (LCP 102).
The GLCP is divided into four functional groups:
1.
Graphical display with Status lines.
2.
Menu keys and indicator lights (LED's) - selecting

mode, changing parameters and switching between
display functions.
3.
Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
4.
Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
Graphical display:
The LCD-display is back-lit with a total of 6 alpha-numeric
lines. All data is displayed on the LCP which can show up to
five operating variables while in [Status] mode.
Display lines:
a.
Status line: Status messages displaying icons and

graphics.
b.
Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying data and

variables defined or chosen by the user. By pressing
the [Status] key, up to one extra line can be added.
c.
Status line: Status messages displaying text.
The display is divided into 3 sections:

Top section (a) shows the status when in status mode or up to
2 variables when not in status mode and in the case of Alarm/
Warning.
The number of the Active Set-up (selected as the Active Set-up
in par. 0-10 Active Set-up) is shown. When programming in
another Set-up than the Active Set-up, the number of the Setup being programmed appears to the right in brackets.
The Middle section (b) shows up to 5 variables with related
unit, regardless of status. In case of alarm/warning, the
warning is shown instead of the variables.
The Bottom section (c) always shows the state of the frequency converter in Status mode.
It is possible to toggle between three status read-out displays
by pressing the [Status] key.
Operating variables with different formatting are shown in
each status screen - see below.
54
Several values or measurements can be linked to each of the

displayed operating variables. The values / measurements to
be displayed can be defined via par. 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small,
par. 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, par. 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
par. 0-23 Display Line 2 Large and par. 0-24 Display Line 3 Large,
which can be accessed via [QUICK MENU], "Q3 Function
Setups", "Q3-1 General Settings", "Q3-13 Display Settings".
Each value / measurement readout parameter selected in
par. 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small to par. 0-24 Display Line 3 Large
has its own scale and number of digits after a possible decimal
point. Larger numeric values are displayed with few digits
after the decimal point.
Ex.: Current readout
5.25 A; 15.2 A 105 A.
Status display I:
This read-out state is standard after start-up or initialisation.
Use [INFO] to obtain information about the value/measurement linked to the displayed operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3,
2, and 3).
See the operating variables shown in the display in this
illustration. 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 are shown in small size. 2 and 3 are
shown in medium size.
Status display III:

This state displays the event and action of the Smart Logic
Control. For further information, see section Smart Logic
Control.
6 6
Display Contrast Adjustment

Press [status] and [] for darker display
Press [status] and [] for brighter display
Indicator lights (LEDs):
Green LED/On: Control section is working.

Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning.
Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.
On
Warn.
Alarm
130BP044.10
Status display II:

See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 2) shown in the
display in this illustration.
In the example, Speed, Motor current, Motor power and
Frequency are selected as variables in the first and second
lines.
1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 are shown in small size. 2 is shown in large
size.
If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or

warning LED lights up. A status and alarm text appear on the
control panel.
The On LED is activated when the frequency converter
receives power from mains voltage, a DC bus terminal, or an
external 24 V supply. At the same time, the back light is on.
55
6 6
GLCP keys
Menu keys
The menu keys are divided into functions. The keys below the
display and indicator lamps are used for parameter set-up,
including choice of display indication during normal
operation.
[Status]
indicates the status of the frequency converter and/or the
motor. 3 different readouts can be chosen by pressing the
[Status] key:
5 line readouts, 4 line readouts or Smart Logic Control.
Use [Status] for selecting the mode of display or for changing
back to Display mode from either the Quick Menu mode, the
Main Menu mode or Alarm mode. Also use the [Status] key to
toggle single or double read-out mode.
[Quick Menu]
allows quick set-up of the frequency converter. The most
common VLT HVAC Drive functions can be programmed here.
Quick Set-up
Function Set-up
Changes Made
Loggings
[Alarm Log]
displays an Alarm list of the five latest alarms (numbered A1A5). To obtain additional details about an alarm, use the arrow
keys to manoeuvre to the alarm number and press [OK].
Information is displayed about the condition of the frequency
converter before it enters the alarm mode.
The Alarm log button on the LCP allows access to both Alarm
log and Maintenance log.
[Back]
reverts to the previous step or layer in the navigation
structure.
The [Quick Menu] consists of:

My Personal Menu
-
[Main Menu]
is used for programming all parameters.The Main Menu
parameters can be accessed immediately unless a password
has been created via par. 0-60 Main Menu Password,
par. 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password, par. 0-65 Personal
Menu Password or par. 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o
Password. For the majority of VLT HVAC Drive applications it is
not necessary to access the Main Menu parameters but
instead the Quick Menu, Quick Set-up and Function Set-up
provides the simplest and quickest access to the typical
required parameters.
It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode and
Quick Menu mode.
Parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing down the
[Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter shortcut allows
direct access to any parameter.
[Cancel]
last change or command will be cancelled as long as the
display has not been changed.
The Function set-up provides quick and easy access to all

parameters required for the majority of VLT HVAC Drive
applications including most VAV and CAV supply and return
fans, cooling tower fans, Primary, Secondary and Condenser
Water Pumps and other pump, fan and compressor applications. Amongst other features it also includes parameters for
selecting which variables to display on the LCP, digital preset
speeds, scaling of analog references, closed loop single zone
and multi-zone applications and specific functions related to
Fans, Pumps and Compressors.
[Info]
displays information about a command, parameter, or
function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed
information when needed.
Exit Info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel].
The Quick Menu parameters can be accessed immediately

unless a password has been created via par. 0-60 Main Menu
Password, par. 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password,
par. 0-65 Personal Menu Password or par. 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password.
It is possible to switch directly between Quick Menu mode and
Main Menu mode.
56
Info
Navigation Keys
The four navigation arrows are used to navigate between the
different choices available in [Quick Menu], [Main Menu] and
[Alarm Log]. Use the keys to move the cursor.
NOTE
[OK] is used for choosing a parameter marked by the cursor

and for enabling the change of a parameter.
[Off]
stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as Enable
[1] or Disable [0] via par. 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP. If no external
stop function is selected and the [Off] key is inactive the motor
can only be stopped by disconnecting the mains supply.
External stop signals activated by means of control

signals or a serial bus will override a start command via
the LCP.
[Auto on]
enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the
control terminals and/or serial communication. When a start
signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the
frequency converter will start. The key can be selected as
Enable [1] or Disable [0] via par. 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.
NOTE
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
has higher priority than the control keys [Hand on]
[Auto on].
Operation Keys for local control are found at the bottom of the
control panel.
[Reset]
is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
(trip). It can be selected as Enable [1] or Disable [0] via
par. 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
The parameter shortcut can be carried out by holding down
the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter shortcut
allows direct access to any parameter.
[Hand On]
enables control of the frequency converter via the GLCP.
[Hand On] also starts the motor, and it is now possible to enter
the motor speed data by means of the arrow keys. The key can
be selected as Enable [1] or Disable [0] via par. 0-40 [Hand on]
Key on LCP.
The following control signals will still be active when [Hand
On] is activated:
[Hand On] - [Off] - [Auto on]

Reset
Coasting stop inverse
Reversing
Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb
Stop command from serial communication
Quick stop
DC brake
57
6 6
6 6
6.1.3 How to Operate Numeric LCP (NLCP)

The following instructions are valid for the NLCP (LCP 101).
The control panel is divided into four functional groups:
1.
Numeric display.
2.
Menu key and indicator lights (LEDs) - changing

parameters and switching between display
functions.
3.
Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
4.
Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
NOTE
Parameter copy is not possible with Numeric Local
Control Panel (LCP101).
Select one of the following modes:
Status Mode: Displays the status of the frequency converter or
the motor.
If an alarm occurs, the NLCP automatically switches to status
mode.
A number of alarms can be displayed.
Quick Setup or Main Menu Mode: Display parameters and
parameter settings.
Illustration 6.1: Numerical LCP (NLCP)
Illustration 6.2: Status display example
Illustration 6.3: Alarm display example
Indicator lights (LEDs):

Green LED/On: Indicates if control section is on.
58
Yellow LED/Wrn.: Indicates a warning.

Flashing red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.
Menu key
Select one of the following modes:
Status
Operation keys
Keys for local control are found at the bottom of the control
panel.
Quick Setup
Main Menu
Main Menu
is used for programming all parameters.
The parameters can be accessed immediately unless a
password has been created via par. 0-60 Main Menu Password,
par. 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password, par. 0-65 Personal
Menu Password or par. 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o
Password.
Quick Setup is used to set up the frequency converter using
only the most essential parameters.
The parameter values can be changed using the up/down
arrows when the value is flashing.
Select Main Menu by pressing the [Menu] key a number of
times until the Main Menu LED is lit.
Select the parameter group [xx-__] and press [OK]
Select the parameter [__-xx] and press [OK]
If the parameter is an array parameter select the array number
and press [OK]
Select the wanted data value and press [OK]
Navigation keys
[Back]
for stepping backwards
Arrow [] []
keys are used for manoeuvring between parameter groups,
parameters and within parameters
130BP079.10
[OK]
is used for choosing a parameter marked by the cursor and for
enabling the change of a parameter.
P 2-03
Status
Menu
Quick
Setup
Setup 1
Main
Menu
Illustration 6.4: Display example
Illustration 6.5: Operation keys of the numerical LCP

(NLCP)
[Hand on]
enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP. [Hand
on] also starts the motor and it is now possible to enter the
motor speed data by means of the arrow keys. The key can be
Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par. 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
External stop signals activated by means of control signals or a
serial bus will override a 'start' command via the LCP.
The following control signals will still be active when [Hand
on] is activated:
[Hand on] - [Off] - [Auto on]
Reset
Coasting stop inverse
Reversing
Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb
Stop command from serial communication
Quick stop
DC brake
[Off]
stops the connected motor. The key can be Enabled [1] or
Disabled [0] via par. 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP.
If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
inactive the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the mains
supply.
[Auto on]
enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the
control terminals and/or serial communication. When a start
signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the
frequency converter will start. The key can be Enabled [1] or
Disabled [0] via par. 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.
NOTE
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
has higher priority than the control keys [Hand on] [Auto
on].
[Reset]
is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
(trip). The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via
par. 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
59
6 6
How to Programme the Frequ...
7 How to Programme the Frequency Converter

7.1 How to Programme
7.1.1 Function Set-ups
Illustration 7.4: Step 4: Function set-ups choices appear.
The Function set-up provides quick and easy access to all

parameters required for the majority of VLT HVAC Drive
applications including most VAV and CAV supply and return
fans, cooling tower fans, Primary, Secondary and Condenser
Water Pumps and other pump, fan and compressor applications.
Choose Q3-1 General Settings. Press [OK].
How to access Function set-up - example
7 7
Illustration 7.5: Step 5: Use the up/down navigation keys
to scroll down to i.e. Q3-11 Analog Outputs. Press [OK].
Illustration 7.1: Step 1: Turn on the frequency converter

(yellow LED lights)
Illustration 7.6: Step 6: Choose par. 6-50. Press [OK].
Illustration 7.2: Step 2: Press the [Quick Menus] button
(Quick Menus choices appear).
to select between the different choices. Press [OK].

to scroll down to Function set-ups. Press [OK].
60
Function Set-ups parameters

The Function Set-ups parameters are grouped in the following
way:
Q3-1 General Settings
Q3-10 Adv. Motor Settings
Q3-11 Analog Output
Q3-12 Clock Settings
Q3-13 Display Settings
Par. 1-90 Motor Thermal Protec-
Par. 6-50 Terminal 42 Output
Par. 0-70 Date and Time
Par. 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
tion
Par. 1-93 Thermistor Source
Par. 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Par. 0-71 Date Format
Scale
Par. 1-29 Automatic Motor
Adaptation (AMA)
Par. 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Par. 0-72 Time Format

Scale
Par. 14-01 Switching Frequency
Par. 0-74 DST/Summertime
Par. 0-23 Display Line 2 Large
Par. 4-53 Warning Speed High
Par. 0-76 DST/Summertime Start

Par. 0-77 DST/Summertime End
Par. 0-24 Display Line 3 Large

Par. 0-37 Display Text 1
7 7
Q3-2 Open Loop Settings

Q3-20 Digital Reference
Q3-21 Analog Reference
Par. 3-10 Preset Reference
Par. 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
Par. 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input
Par. 6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
Par. 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
Par. 6-13 Terminal 53 High Current

Par. 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Par. 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
61
7 7
Q3-3 Closed Loop Settings

Q3-30 Single Zone Int. Set Point
Q3-31 Single Zone Ext. Set Point
Q3-32 Multi Zone / Adv
Par. 1-00 Configuration Mode
Par. 20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit
Par. 3-15 Reference 1 Source
Par. 20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb.
Par. 3-16 Reference 2 Source
Par. 20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.
Par. 20-00 Feedback 1 Source
Par. 20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion
Par. 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit

Par. 6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant


Par. 6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero
Par. 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
Par. 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Par. 20-21 Setpoint 1
Par. 20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control
Par. 20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]
Par. 20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz]
Par. 20-93 PID Proportional Gain
Par. 20-94 PID Integral Time
Par. 20-70 Closed Loop Type
Par. 20-71 PID Performance
Par. 20-72 PID Output Change
Par. 20-73 Minimum Feedback Level
Par. 20-74 Maximum Feedback Level
Par. 20-79 PID Autotuning



Par. 4-56 Warning Feedback Low
Par. 4-57 Warning Feedback High
Par. 20-20 Feedback Function
62
Q3-4 Application Settings

Q3-40 Fan Functions
Q3-41 Pump Functions
Q3-42 Compressor Functions
Par. 22-60 Broken Belt Function
Par. 22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up
Par. 1-03 Torque Characteristics
Par. 22-61 Broken Belt Torque
Par. 22-21 Low Power Detection
Par. 1-71 Start Delay
Par. 22-62 Broken Belt Delay
Par. 22-22 Low Speed Detection
Par. 22-75 Short Cycle Protection
Par. 4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up
Par. 22-23 No-Flow Function
Par. 22-76 Interval between Starts
Par. 22-24 No-Flow Delay
Par. 22-77 Minimum Run Time
Par. 22-22 Low Speed Detection
Par. 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
Par. 22-23 No-Flow Function

Par. 22-24 No-Flow Delay
Par. 22-41 Minimum Sleep Time

Par. 22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM]
Par. 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode

Par. 22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz]
Par. 22-41 Minimum Sleep Time
Par. 22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference
Par. 5-40 Function Relay
Par. 22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM]
Par. 22-45 Setpoint Boost
Par. 1-73 Flying Start
Par. 22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz]
Par. 22-46 Maximum Boost Time
Par. 1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]
Par. 22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference
Par. 22-26 Dry Pump Function
Par. 1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz]
Par. 22-45 Setpoint Boost
Par. 22-27 Dry Pump Delay
Par. 22-46 Maximum Boost Time
Par. 22-80 Flow Compensation
Par. 2-10 Brake Function
Par. 22-81 Square-linear Curve Approximation
Par. 2-16 AC brake Max. Current
Par. 22-82 Work Point Calculation
Par. 2-17 Over-voltage Control
Par. 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]
Par. 22-84 Speed at No-Flow [Hz]
Par. 1-71 Start Delay
Par. 22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM]
Par. 1-80 Function at Stop
Par. 22-86 Speed at Design Point [Hz]
Par. 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current
Par. 22-87 Pressure at No-Flow Speed
Par. 4-10 Motor Speed Direction
Par. 22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed
7 7
Par. 22-89 Flow at Design Point

Par. 22-90 Flow at Rated Speed
See also VLT HVAC Drive Programming Guide for a detailed

description of the Function Setups parameter groups.
7.1.2 Main Menu Mode

Both the GLCP and NLCP provide access to the main menu
mode. Select the Main Menu mode by pressing the [Main
Menu] key. Illustration 6.2 shows the resulting read-out, which
appears on the display of the GLCP.
Lines 2 through 5 on the display show a list of parameter
groups which can be chosen by toggling the up and down
buttons.
Each parameter has a name and number which remain the

same regardless of the programming mode. In the Main Menu
mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The first digit
of the parameter number (from the left) indicates the parameter group number.
All parameters can be changed in the Main Menu. The configuration of the unit (par. 1-00 Configuration Mode) will
determine other parameters available for programming. For
example, selecting Closed Loop enables additional parameters
related to closed loop operation. Option cards added to the
unit enable additional parameters associated with the option
device.
Illustration 7.8: Display example.
63
7 7
7.1.3 Changing Data

1.
Press [Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] key.
2.
Use [] and [] keys keys to find parameter group to

edit.
3.
Press [OK] key.
4.
Use [] and [] keys to find parameter to edit.
5.
Press [OK] key.
6.
Use [] and [] keys to select correct parameter

setting. Or, to move to digits within a number, use
keys. Cursor indicates digit selected to change. []
key increases the value, [] key decreases the value.
7.
Press [Cancel] key to disregard change, or press [OK]

key to accept change and enter new setting.
Use the up/down navigation keys to change the data value.

The up key enlarges the data value, and the down key reduces
the data value. Place the cursor on the value to be saved and
press [OK].
7.1.4 Changing a Text Value

If the selected parameter is a text value, change the text value
by means of the up/down navigation keys.
The up key increases the value, and the down key decreases
the value. Place the cursor on the value to be saved and press
[OK].
7.1.6 Changing of Data Value, Step-by-Step
7.1.5 Changing a Group of Numeric Data

Values
If the chosen parameter represents a numeric data value,
change the chosen data value by means of the [] and []
navigation keys as well as the up/down [] [] navigation
keys. Use the ] and [] navigation keys to move the cursor
horizontally.
Certain parameters can be changed step by step or infinitely

variably. This applies to par. 1-20 Motor Power [kW],
par. 1-22 Motor Voltage and par. 1-23 Motor Frequency.
The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric data
values and as numeric data values infinitely variably.
7.1.7 Read-out and Programming of Indexed

Parameters
Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.
Par. 15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code to par. 15-32 Alarm Log: Time
contain a fault log which can be read out. Choose a parameter,
press [OK], and use the up/down navigation keys to scroll
through the value log.
Use par. 3-10 Preset Reference as another example:
Choose the parameter, press [OK], and use the up/down
navigation keys keys to scroll through the indexed values. To
change the parameter value, select the indexed value and
press [OK]. Change the value by using the up/down keys. Press
[OK] to accept the new setting. Press [Cancel] to abort. Press
[Back] to leave the parameter.
64
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
7.2 Commonly Used Parameters Explanations
Function:
Select a variable for display in line 1, left
position.
[0] *
None
No display value selected
[37]
Display Text 1
Defines the language to be used in the
Enables an individual text string to be

written, for display in the LCP or to be
display.
read via serial communication.
0-01 Language
Option:
Option:
Function:
The frequency converter can be delivered
[38]
Display Text 2
with 2 different language packages.
English and German are included in both
packages. English cannot be erased or

manipulated.

[0] * English
Part of Language packages 1 - 2
[1]
Deutsch
Part of Language packages 1 - 2
[2]
Francais
Part of Language package 1
[3]
Dansk
[4]
Spanish
[5]
Italiano
[39]
[89]
Date and Time Displays the current date and time.
[953]
Profibus
Displays Profibus communication
Warning Word
warnings.
Readout
View the number of CAN control
Transmit Error
transmission errors since the last power-
Counter
up.
Readout
View the number of CAN control receipt
Receive Error
errors since the last power-up.
Readout
[1005]
[6]
Svenska
[7]
Nederlands
[10] Chinese
Language package 2
[20] Suomi
[22] English US
[27] Greek
[28] Bras.port
[36] Slovenian
Display Text 3
[1006]
7 7
Counter
[1007]
[1013]
Readout Bus
View the number of Bus Off events since
Off Counter
the last power-up.
Warning
View a DeviceNet-specific warning word.
Parameter
One separate bit is assigned to every

warning.
[1115]
LON Warning
Shows the LON-specific warnings.
Word
[39] Korean
[40] Japanese
interface file of the Neuron C chip on the
[41] Turkish
LON option.
[42] Trad.Chinese
[43] Bulgarian
[44] Srpski
[45] Romanian
[46] Magyar
[47] Czech
[48] Polski
[49] Russian
[50] Thai
[51] Bahasa Indonesia Part of Language package 2
[1117]
[1118]
[1501]
XIF Revision
Shows the version of the external
LonWorks
Shows the software version of the
Revision
application program of the Neuron C

chip on the LON option.
Running Hours View the number of running hours of the

motor.
[1502]
kWh Counter
View the mains power consumption in

kWh.
[1600]
Control Word
View the Control Word sent from the

frequency converter via the serial
communication port in hex code.
[1601]
Reference
Total reference (sum of digital/analog/
[Unit]
preset/bus/freeze ref./catch up and

slow-down) in selected unit.
[52] Hrvatski
[1602] * Reference [%]
Total reference (sum of digital/analog/

preset/bus/freeze ref./catch up and
slow-down) in percent.
65
7 7
Option:
Option:
[1603]
[1605]
Function:
Status Word
95 5 C; cutting back in occurs at 70
Present status word
Main Actual
View the two-byte word sent with the
Value [%]
Status word to the bus Master reporting
5 C.
[1635]
the Main Actual Value.

[1609]
Custom
Readout
[1610]
Power [kW]
View the user-defined readouts as
Power [hp]
[1636]
defined in par. 0-30 Custom Readout Unit,

par. 0-31 Custom Readout Min Value and
par. 0-32 Custom Readout Max Value.
[1637]
Actual power consumed by the motor in
[1638]
Actual power consumed by the motor in
[1639]
HP.
[1612]
Motor Voltage
Inverter
Percentage load of the inverters
Thermal
kW.
[1611]
Function:
Inv. Nom.
Nominal current of the frequency
Current
converter
Inv. Max.
Maximum current of the frequency
Current
converter
SL Controller
State
State of the event executed by the

control
Control Card
Temperature of the control card.
Temp.
Voltage supplied to the motor.
[1643]
Timed Actions
Status
[1613]
[1614]
Frequency
Motor Current
Motor frequency, i.e. the output frequency from the frequency converter in Hz.
Frequency [%]
[1652]
Motor frequency, i.e. the output frequency from the frequency converter in
percent.
[1616]
Torque [Nm]
Speed [RPM]
[1653]
[1654]
Motor speed reference. Actual speed will

depend on slip compensation being
used (compensation set in par. 1-62 Slip
Compensation). If not used, actual speed
will be the value read in the display
[1655]
[1656]
minus motor slip.

[1618]
Sum of the external reference as a
Reference
percentage, i.e. the sum of analog/pulse/

bus.
Feedback
Reference value from programmed
[Unit]
digital input(s).
Digi Pot
View the contribution of the digital
Reference
potentiometer to the actual reference

Feedback.
Feedback 1
View the value of Feedback 1. See also
[Unit]
par. 20-0*.
Feedback 2
[Unit]
par. 20-0*.
Feedback 3
[Unit]
par. 20-0*.
Present motor load as a percentage of

the rated motor torque.
[1617]
External
Phase current of the motor measured as

effective value.
[1615]
[1650]
Motor Thermal Thermal load on the motor, calculated
[1658]
PID Output [%] Returns the Drive Closed Loop PID

controller output value in percent.
by the ETR function. See also parameter

group 1-9* Motor Temperature.
[1622]
[1626]
Torque [%]
percentage.
Regarding order, see par. 16-60 Digital

Input. Bit 0 is at the extreme right.
Power Filtered
[1661]
Power Filtered
[1630]
DC Link
Intermediate circuit voltage in the
Voltage
frequency converter.
[hp]
[1662]
[1663]
Brake Energy /s Present brake power transferred to an

external brake resistor.
Stated as an instantaneous value.
Brake Energy /
Brake power transferred to an external
2 min
brake resistor. The mean power is

calculated continuously for the most
[1664]
[1665]
Terminal 53
Setting of input terminal 53. Current = 0;
Switch Setting
Voltage = 1.
Analog Input
Actual value at input 53 either as a
53
reference or protection value.
Terminal 54
Setting of input terminal 54. Current = 0;
Switch Setting
Voltage = 1.
Analog Input
Actual value at input 54 either as
54
reference or protection value.
Analog Output Actual value at output 42 in mA. Use

42 [mA]
par. 6-50 Terminal 42 Output to select the
variable to be represented by output 42.
recent 120 seconds.

[1634]
Heatsink Temp. Present heat sink temperature of the

frequency converter. The cut-out limit is
66
Displays the status of the digital inputs.

Signal low = 0; Signal high = 1.
[1627]
[1633]
Digital Input
Shows the actual torque produced, in
[kW]
[1632]
[1660]
[1666]
Digital Output
[bin]
Binary value of all digital outputs.
Option:
Option:
[1667]
Function:
Pulse Input #29 Actual value of the frequency applied at
[Hz]
[1668]
[1670]
[1671]
terminal 33 as a pulse input.
Pulse Output
Actual value of pulses applied to
#27 [Hz]
terminal 27 in digital output mode.
Pulse Output
Actual value of pulses applied to
#29 [Hz]
terminal 29 in digital output mode.
Relay Output
[bin]
View the setting of all relays.
[1672]
Counter A
View the present value of Counter A.
[1673]
Counter B
View the present value of Counter B.
[1675]
[1677]
The bits reflect the status for the
Word
programmed Preventive Maintenance

Events in parameter group 23-1*
Analog In
Actual value of the signal on input
X30/11
X30/11 (General Purpose I/O Card.
[1830]
Analog Input
Shows the value of the signal applied to
X42/1
terminal X42/1 on the Analog I/O card.
Analog Input
X42/3
Analog Input
X42/5
[1833]
Analog Out
X42/7 [V]

[1834]
Analog Out
X42/9 [V]
Analog Out
X42/11 [V]
[1831]
[1832]
[1835]
Option)
[1676]
Maintenance
Pulse Input #33 Actual value of the frequency applied at

[Hz]
[1669]
[1696]
terminal 29 as a pulse input.
Function:
Analog In
X30/12
Analog Out
X30/8 [mA]
Actual value of the signal on input

X30/12 (General Purpose I/O Card.
[1836]
Analog Input
Optional)
[1837]
Temp. Input
[1838]
Temp. Input
[1839]
Temp. Input
X48/2 [mA]
X48/4
Actual value at output X30/8 (General

Purpose I/O Card. Optional) Use
X48/7
par. 6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output to select

the variable to be shown.
X48/10
[1680]
Fieldbus CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from the
[1850]
Sensorless
[2117]
Ext. 1
The value of the reference for extended
word via the serial communications
Reference
Closed Loop Controller 1
network e.g. from the BMS, PLC or other
[Unit]
Bus Master.
[1682]
Fieldbus REF 1
Readout [unit]
Main reference value sent with control
master controller.
[1684]
[1685]
Comm. Option
STW
Extended fieldbus communication

option status word.
FC Port CTW 1
Control word (CTW) received from the
[2118]
FC Port REF 1
Status word (STW) sent to the Bus
[2119]
[2137]
Master.
[1690]
Alarm Word
[1692]
Alarm Word 2
Warning Word
extended Closed Loop Controller 1
Ext. 1 Output
The value of the output from extended
[%]
Ext. 2
Reference
[Unit]
One or more alarms in a Hex code (used
[2138]
Ext. 2
The value of the feedback signal for
Feedback
[Unit]
[2139]
Ext. 2 Output
[%]

[2157]
Ext. 3
Reference
for serial communications)

[1691]
Feedback
[Unit]
Bus Master.
[1686]
Ext. 1
One or more alarms in a Hex code (used

for serial communications)
One or more warnings in a Hex code
(used for serial communications)
[1693]
Warning Word
2
One or more warnings in a Hex code

(used for serial communications)
Ext. 3
[1694]
Ext. Status
One or more status conditions in a Hex
Feedback
Word
code (used for serial communications)
[Unit]
Ext. Status
One or more status conditions in a Hex
[1695]
Word 2
code (used for serial communications)
[Unit]
[2158]
[2159]
Ext. 3 Output
[%]
67
7 7
7 7
0-24 Display Line 3 Large
Option:
Select a variable for display in line 3.
[2230]
Function:
No-Flow Power The calculated No Flow Power for the
actual operating speed
[2316]
par. 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.
Cascade Status Status for the operation of the Cascade

Controller
[2581]
Pump Status
Status for the operation of each individ-
0-37 Display Text 1

Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - In this parameter it is possible to write an individual text

0]
ual pump controlled by the Cascade
string for display in the LCP or to be read via serial

communication. If to be displayed permanently select
Controller
[3110]
Function:
Maintenance
Text
[2580]
Option:
[1502] * kWh Counter The options are the same as those listed in
Display Text 1 in par. 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small,
Bypass Status
par. 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, par. 0-22 Display Line 1.3
Word
Small, par. 0-23 Display Line 2 Large or par. 0-24 Display
Bypass
Line 3 Large. Use the [] or [] buttons on the LCP to
Running Hours
change a character. Use the [] and [] buttons to
[9913]
Idle time
move the cursor. When a character is highlighted by the
[9914]
Paramdb
cursor, it can be changed. Use the [] or [] buttons on
[3111]
requests in
the LCP to change a character. A character can be
queue
inserted by placing the cursor between two characters
[9920]
HS Temp. (PC1)
[9921]
HS Temp. (PC2)
[9922]
HS Temp. (PC3)
[9923]
HS Temp. (PC4)
[9924]
HS Temp. (PC5)
[9925]
HS Temp. (PC6)
[9926]
HS Temp. (PC7)
[9927]
HS Temp. (PC8)
and pressing [] or [].
0-38 Display Text 2

Range:
0*
[0 0]
Function:
In this parameter it is possible to write an individual text
Display Text 2 in par. 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small,
NOTE
par. 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, par. 0-22 Display Line 1.3
Please consult the VLT HVAC Drive Programming Guide,

MG.11.CX.YY for detailed information.
Line 3 Large. Use the [] or [] buttons on the LCP to
Small, par. 0-23 Display Line 2 Large or par. 0-24 Display

change a character. Use the [] and [] buttons to
move the cursor. When a character is highlighted by the
cursor, this character can be changed. A character can

Select a variable for display in line 1, middle position.
Option:
be inserted by placing the cursor between two charac-
Function:
[1614] * Motor Current The options are the same as those listed
in par. 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.
0-39 Display Text 3

Range:
Select a variable for display in line 1, right position.
Option:
ters and pressing [] or [].
0*
0]
Function:
[1610] * Power [kW] The options are the same as those listed in
Function:
[0 - In this parameter it is possible to write an individual text

Display Text 3 in par. 0-20 Display Line 1.1
Small,par. 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, par. 0-22 Display
Line 1.3 Small, par. 0-23 Display Line 2 Large or
0-23 Display Line 2 Large

Select a variable for display in line 2.
par. 0-24 Display Line 3 Large. Use the [] or [] buttons
Option:
on the LCP to change a character. Use the [] and []
Function:
[1613] * Frequency The options are the same as those listed in

buttons to move the cursor. When a character is

highlighted by the cursor, this character can be
changed. A character can be inserted by placing the
cursor between two characters and pressing [] or [].
68
0-70 Date and Time

Range:
Application
dependent*
1-00 Configuration Mode

Function:
[Application
dependant]
Option:
Sets the date and time of the
external PID controller providing a speed
internal clock. The format to be
reference signal as output.
used is set in par. 0-71 Date
[3]
Format and par. 0-72 Time
Closed
Motor Speed will be determined by a reference
Loop
from the built-in PID controller varying the motor
Format.
speed as part of a closed loop control process (e.g.

constant pressure or flow). The PID controller must
0-71 Date Format

Option:
be configured in par. 20-** or via the Function
Function:
Setups accessed by pressing the [Quick Menus]

button.
Sets the date format to be used in the LCP.

[0] * YYYY-MM-DD
NOTE
[1] * DD-MM-YYYY
[2]
Function:
This parameter cannot be changed when motor is

running.
MM/DD/YYYY
0-72 Time Format

Option:
NOTE
Function:
Sets the time format to be used in the LCP.
[0] *
24 h
[1]
12 h
1-03 Torque Characteristics
0-74 DST/Summertime
Option:
When set for Closed Loop, the commands Reversing and

Start Reversing will not reverse the direction of the
motor.
Option:
Function:
Choose how Daylight Saving Time/Summertime
should be handled. For manual DST/Summertime
Compres-
Compressor [0]: For speed control of screw and
sor torque
scroll compressors. Provides a voltage which is
Summertime Start and par. 0-77 DST/Summertime
optimized for a constant torque load characteristic of the motor in the entire range down to 10
End.
Hz.
enter the start date and end date in par. 0-76 DST/
[1]
[0] * Off
[2]
Manual
Variable
Variable Torque [1]: For speed control of centrifu-
torque
gal pumps and fans. Also to be used when

controlling more than one motor from the same
0-76 DST/Summertime Start

Range:
Application
dependent*
Function:
[0]
frequency converter (e.g. multiple condenser fans

or cooling tower fans). Provides a voltage which
Function:
[Application
dependant]
is optimized for a squared torque load character-
Sets the date and time when

summertime/DST starts. The date
is programmed in the format
selected in par. 0-71 Date
Format.
istic of the motor.

[2]
Auto
Auto Energy Optimization Compressor [2]: For
Energy
Optim. CT
optimum energy efficient speed control of screw

and scroll compressors. Provides a voltage which
is optimized for a constant torque load character-
0-77 DST/Summertime End

Range:
Application
dependent*
istic of the motor in the entire range down to
Function:
[Application
dependant]
Sets the date and time when

summertime/DST ends. The date
is programmed in the format
selected in par. 0-71 Date
Format.
[0] * Open
Loop
the voltage exactly to the current load situation,

thereby reducing energy consumption and
audible noise from the motor. To obtain optimal
performance, the motor power factor cos phi
must be set correctly. This value is set in
par. 14-43 Motor Cosphi. The parameter has a
default value which is automatically adjusted
1-00 Configuration Mode

Option:
15Hz but in addition the AEO feature will adapt
when the motor data is programmed. These
Function:
settings will typically ensure optimum motor
Motor speed is determined by applying a speed

reference or by setting desired speed when in
voltage but if the motor power factor cos phi
Hand Mode.
out using par. 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
Open Loop is also used if the frequency converter

is part of a closed loop control system based on an
(AMA). It is very rarely necessary to adjust the
requires tuning, an AMA function can be carried
motor power factor parameter manually.
69
7 7
1-03 Torque Characteristics
1-22 Motor Voltage
Option:
Range:
Function:
Function:
[3]
Auto
Auto Energy Optimization VT [3]: For optimum
This parameter cannot be adjusted
Energy
energy efficient speed control of centrifugal
while the motor is running.
Optim. VT
pumps and fans. Provides a voltage which is

optimized for a squared torque load characteristic
1-23 Motor Frequency
of the motor but in addition the AEO feature will
Range:
adapt the voltage exactly to the current load

situation, thereby reducing energy consumption
Application
Function:
[20 -
and audible noise from the motor. To obtain
with 230/400 V motors, set the nameplate
optimal performance, the motor power factor cos

phi must be set correctly. This value is set in
data for 230 V/50 Hz. Adapt

par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] and
par. 14-43 Motor Cosphi. The parameter has a
par. 3-03 Maximum Reference to the 87 Hz

application.
default value and is automatically adjusted when

the motor data is programmed. These settings
7 7
Select the motor frequency value from the
dependent* 1000 Hz] motor nameplate data.For 87 Hz operation
will typically ensure optimum motor voltage but
NOTE
if the motor power factor cos phi requires tuning,

an AMA function can be carried out using
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is

running.
par. 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA). It is

very rarely necessary to adjust the motor power
factor parameter manually.
1-24 Motor Current

Range:
Application
dependent*
1-20 Motor Power [kW]

Range:
Application
Function:
[Applica-
Function:
[Application
dependant]
data. This data is used for calculat-
Enter the nominal motor power in kW
depend-
tion
ent*
dependant] The default value corresponds to the
ing motor torque, motor thermal

protection etc.
according to the motor nameplate data.

nominal rated output of the unit.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running. Depending on the
choices made in par. 0-03 Regional
Enter the nominal motor current

value from the motor nameplate
NOTE
running.
Settings, either par. 1-20 Motor Power

[kW] or par. 1-21 Motor Power [HP] is
Range:
made invisible.
Application
dependent*
1-21 Motor Power [HP]

Range:
Function:
[100 - 60000 Enter the nominal motor speed
RPM]
value from the motor nameplate
data. This data is used for calculat-
Function:
Application [Applicadependtion
ent*
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed
ing automatic motor compensations.
Enter the nominal motor power in HP

according to the motor nameplate data.
dependant] The default value corresponds to the

nominal rated output of the unit.
the motor is running.
NOTE
running.
Depending on the choices made in

par. 0-03 Regional Settings, either
1-28 Motor Rotation Check
par. 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or
Option:
par. 1-21 Motor Power [HP] is made invisi-
Function:
Following installation and connection of the motor,
this function allows the correct motor rotation
ble.
direction to be verified. Enabling this function
1-22 Motor Voltage

Range:
Application
dependent*
overrides any bus commands or digital inputs,

except External Interlock and Safe Stop (if included).
Function:
[Application Enter the nominal motor voltage
dependant]
data. The default value corresponds
70
[0] * Off
Motor Rotation Check is not active.
according to the motor nameplate

[1]
Enabled Motor Rotation Check is enabled. Once enabled,
to the nominal rated output of the
Display shows:
unit.
Note! Motor may run in wrong direction.
Pressing [OK], [Back] or [Cancel] will dismiss the message and

display a new message: Press [Hand on] to start the motor.
Press [Cancel] to abort. Pressing [Hand on] starts the motor at
5 Hz in forward direction and the display shows: Motor is
running. Check if motor rotation direction is correct. Press [Off]
to stop the motor. Pressing [Off] stops the motor and resets
par. 1-28 Motor Rotation Check. If motor rotation direction is
incorrect, two motor phase cables should be interchanged.
IMPORTANT:
NOTE
If one of the settings in par. 1-2* Motor Data is changed,
par. 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to par. 1-39 Motor Poles,
the advanced motor parameters, will return to default
setting.
running.
NOTE
Full AMA should be run without filter only while
reduced AMA should be run with filter.
Mains power must be removed before disconnecting

motor phase cables.
See section: Application Examples > Automatic Motor Adaptation in the Design Guide.
1-71 Start Delay
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

Option:
Function:
Range:
0.0 s*
Function:
[0.0 - 120.0
The function selected in par. 1-80 Function at
s]
The AMA function optimizes dynamic motor
Stop is active in the delay period.
performance by automatically optimizing the
Enter the time delay required before
advanced motor parameters par. 1-30 Stator
commencing acceleration.
Resistance (Rs) to par. 1-35 Main Reactance
[0] * Off
[1]
(Xh)) while the motor is stationary.
1-73 Flying Start
No function
Option:
Enable
performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the
complete
rotor resistance Rr, the stator leakage
AMA
reactance X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2
which is spinning freely due to a mains drop-out.

When par. 1-73 Flying Start is enabled,
par. 1-71 Start Delay has no function.
and the main reactance Xh.

[2]
Enable
Search direction for flying start is linked to the
Performs a reduced AMA of the stator resist-
setting in par. 4-10 Motor Speed Direction.

Clockwise [0]: Flying start search in clockwise
reduced AMA ance Rs in the system only. Select this option if

an LC filter is used between the frequency
direction. If not successful, a DC brake is carried
converter and the motor.
out.
Both Directions [2]: The flying start will first make a
Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand on] after selecting [1] or [2]. See also the item Automatic Motor Adaptation in
the Design Guide. After a normal sequence, the display will
read: Press [OK] to finish AMA. After pressing the [OK] key
the frequency converter is ready for operation.
search in the direction determined by the last

reference (direction). If not finding the speed it will
make a search in the other direction. If not successful, a DC brake will be activated in the time set in
par. 2-02 DC Braking Time. Start will then take place
from 0 Hz.
NOTE
Function:
This function makes it possible to catch a motor
For the best adaptation of the frequency

converter, run AMA on a cold motor
AMA cannot be performed while the motor is
running
[0] * Disabled Select Disable [0] if this function is not required

[1]
Enabled
Select Enable [1] to enable the frequency converter

to catch and control a spinning motor.
1-80 Function at Stop

Option:
Function:
NOTE
Select the frequency converter function after a
Avoid generating external torque during AMA.
stop command or after the speed is ramped

down to the settings in par. 1-81 Min Speed for
Function at Stop [RPM].
[0] * Coast
Leaves motor in free mode.
[1]
Energizes motor with a DC holding current

(see par. 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current).
DC Hold/
Motor
Preheat
71
7 7
7 7
1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection
Range:
Option:
Application
dependent*
Function:
[Application
Set the desired motor speed for trip
dependant]
[1]
limit. If the Trip Speed is set to 0, the
Thermistor
Activates a warning when the connected
warning
thermistor in the motor reacts in the event of
function is not active. If the speed at

any time after the start (or during a
stop) falls below the value in the
motor over-temperature.
[2]
parameter, the drive will trip with an
Thermistor
Stops (trips) the frequency converter when the
trip
connected thermistor in the motor reacts in

the event of motor over-temperature.
alarm [A49] Speed Limit. Function at

[3]
stop.
0 RPM*
[Application
Function:
ETR warning
1
[4] * ETR trip 1
dependant]
[5]
NOTE
ETR warning
2
This parameter is only available if par. 0-02 Motor Speed

Unit is set to [RPM].
[6]
ETR trip 2
[7]
ETR warning
3
1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz]
[8]
ETR trip 3
Range:
[9]
ETR warning
4
Function:
Application
dependent*
[Application
If the Trip Speed is set to 0, the
dependant]
function is not active.

If the speed at any time after the
start (or during a stop) falls below
the value in the parameter, the
drive will trip with an alarm [A49]
Speed Limit. Function at stop.
0.0 Hz*
[10] ETR trip 4
ETR (Electronic Thermal Relay) functions 1-4 will calculate the

load when set-up where they were selected is active. For
example ETR-3 starts calculating when set-up 3 is selected. For
the North American market: The ETR functions provide class
20 motor overload protection in accordance with NEC.
[Application
dependant]
NOTE
This parameter is only available if par. 0-02 Motor Speed
Unit is set to [Hz].
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection
Option:
Function:
The frequency converter determines the motor
temperature for motor protection in two different ways:
Via a thermistor sensor connected to

one of the analog or digital inputs
(par. 1-93 Thermistor Source).
Via calculation (ETR = Electronic

Thermal Relay) of the thermal load,
based on the actual load and time.
The calculated thermal load is
compared with the rated motor
current IM,N and the rated motor
frequency fM,N. The calculations
estimate the need for a lower load at
lower speed due to less cooling from
the fan incorporated in the motor.
[0] * No protection
If the motor is continuously overloaded and no

warning or trip of frequency converter is
wanted.
72
2-10 Brake Function

Option:
In order to maintain PELV, all connections made to the

control terminals must be PELV, e.g. thermistor must be
reinforced/ double insulated
Function:
[0] * Off
No brake resistor installed.
[1]
Resistor
Brake resistor incorporated in the system, for
brake
dissipation of surplus brake energy as heat.

Connecting a brake resistor allows a higher DC
NOTE
link voltage during braking (generating
Danfoss recommends using 24 VDC as thermistor supply

voltage.
operation). The Resistor brake function is only

active in frequency converters with an integral
dynamic brake.
1-93 Thermistor Source

Option:
[2]
AC brake
AC Brake will only work in Compressor Torque
Function:
mode in par. 1-03 Torque Characteristics.
Select the input to which the thermistor

(PTC sensor) should be connected. An
analog input option [1] or [2] cannot be
selected if the analog input is already in use
as a reference source (selected in
2-16 AC brake Max. Current

Range:
100.0 %*
Function:
[Application
Enter the maximum permissible
dependant]
par. 3-15 Reference 1 Source,
current when using AC brake to avoid

overheating of motor windings. The AC
par. 3-16 Reference 2 Source or
brake function is available in Flux
par. 3-17 Reference 3 Source).
mode only (FC 302 only).
When using MCB 112, choice [0] None must

always be selected.
[0] * None
[1]
2-17 Over-voltage Control

Option:
Function:
Analog input 53
Over-voltage control (OVC) reduces the risk of the
[2]
Analog input 54
frequency converter tripping due to an over
[3]
Digital input 18
voltage on the DC link caused by generative power
[4]
Digital input 19
from the load.
[5]
Digital input 32
[6]
Digital input 33
[0]
Disabled No OVC required.
[2] * Enabled
NOTE
running.
Activates OVC.
NOTE
The ramp time is automatically adjusted to avoid
tripping of the frequency converter.
NOTE
Digital input should be set to [0] PNP - Active at 24V in
par. 5-00.
50 %*
Function:
[Applica-
Range:
Applica-
2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current

Range:
3-02 Minimum Reference
Enter a value for holding current as a
Function:
[Applica-
Enter the Minimum Reference. The
tion
tion
depend-
dependant] obtainable by summing all references.
ent*
Minimum Reference is the lowest value

The Minimum Reference value and unit
tion
percentage of the rated motor current IM,N
matches the configuration choice made
dependant]
set in par. 1-24 Motor Current. 100% DC
in par. 1-00 Configuration Mode and
holding current corresponds to IM,N.
par. 20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit,
This parameter holds the motor (holding
respectively.
torque) or pre-heats the motor.
NOTE
This parameter is active if [1] DC hold/

Preheat is selected in par. 1-80 Function at
This parameter is used in open

loop only.
Stop.
NOTE
The maximum value depends on the rated motor
current.
Avoid 100 % current for too long. It may damage the
motor.
73
7 7
7 7
3-03 Maximum Reference

Range:
Function:
Applica-
[Applica-
Enter the maximum acceptable value for
tion
tion
the remote reference. The Maximum
depend-
depend-
Reference value and unit matches the
ent*
ant]
configuration choice made in

par. 1-00 Configuration Mode and
par. 20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit,
respectively.
NOTE
If operating with par. 1-00 Configuration Mode set for Closed Loop
[3], par. 20-14 Maximum
Reference/Feedb. must be used.
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]

Range:
Function:
Application
dependent*
[Application
dependant]
The jog speed is a fixed output

speed at which the frequency
3-10 Preset Reference
converter is running when the
Array [8]
jog function is activated.
Range:
0.00
%*
See also par. 3-80 Jog Ramp
Function:
[-100.00 - Enter up to eight different preset references
100.00 %] (0-7) in this parameter, using array programming. The preset reference is stated as a
Time.
Application
dependent*
[Application
dependant]
percentage of the value RefMAX

(par. 3-03 Maximum Reference, for closed loop
3-15 Reference 1 Source
see par. 20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.).
Option:
Function:
When using preset references, select Preset
Select the reference input to be used
ref. bit 0 / 1 / 2 [16], [17] or [18] for the
for the first reference signal.
corresponding digital inputs in parameter
Par. 3-15 Reference 1 Source,
group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
par. 3-16 Reference 2 Source and

par. 3-17 Reference 3 Source define up
to three different reference signals.
The sum of these reference signals
defines the actual reference.
[0]
No function
[1] * Analog input 53

[2]
Analog input 54
[7]
Pulse input 29
[8]
Pulse input 33
[20] Digital pot.meter

[21] Analog input X30/11
[22] Analog input X30/12
[23] Analog Input X42/1
[30] Ext. Closed Loop 1
74
3-16 Reference 2 Source

Option:
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

Function:
Range:
Function:
Select the reference input to be used
Application
for the second reference signal.
depend-
tion
[Applica-
Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the

deceleration time from par. 1-25 Motor
par. 3-15 Reference 1 Source,
ent*
dependant]
Nominal Speed to 0 RPM. Choose a
par. 3-16 Reference 2 Source and
ramp-down time such that no over-
par. 3-17 Reference 3 Source define up
voltage arises in the inverter due to
to three different reference signals.
regenerative operation of the motor,
The sum of these reference signals
and such that the generated current
defines the actual reference.
does not exceed the current limit set in
par. 4-18 Current Limit. See ramp-up

time in par. 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up
Time.
[0]
No function
[1]
Analog input 53
[2]
Analog input 54
[7]
Pulse input 29
4-10 Motor Speed Direction
[8]
Pulse input 33
Option:
par .3 42 =
tdec nnorm par .1 25

s
ref rpm
Function:
[20] * Digital pot.meter
Selects the motor speed direction required.
[21]
Analog input X30/11
Use this parameter to prevent unwanted
[22]
Analog input X30/12
reversing.
[23]
Analog Input X42/1
[24]
Analog Input X42/3
[25]
Analog Input X42/5
[29]
Analog Input X48/2
[30]
Ext. Closed Loop 1
[31]
Ext. Closed Loop 2
[32]
Ext. Closed Loop 3
[0]
Application
dependent*
Only operation in clockwise direction will be

allowed.
[2] * Both directions Operation in both clockwise and anticlockwise direction will be allowed.
NOTE
The setting in par. 4-10 Motor Speed Direction has impact
on the Flying Start in par. 1-73 Flying Start.
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM]

Range:
Clockwise
Function:
[Application Enter a value for the jog speed nJOG,
dependant]
which is a fixed output speed. The
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]

Range:
frequency converter runs at this
Application
speed when the jog function is activa-
dependent*
Function:
[Application Enter the minimum limit for motor
dependant]
speed. The Motor Speed Low Limit
ted. The maximum limit is defined in
can be set to correspond to the
par. .
manufacturers recommended
See also par. 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.
minimum motor speed. The Motor

Speed Low Limit must not exceed
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
the setting in par. 4-13 Motor Speed
Range:
High Limit [RPM].
Application
dependent*
Function:
[Applica-
Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the
tion
acceleration time from 0 RPM to
dependant]
par. 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed. Choose
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

Range:
a ramp-up time such that the output
Application
current does not exceed the current
dependent*
Function:
[Application Enter the minimum limit for motor
dependant]
speed. The Motor Speed Low Limit
limit in par. 4-18 Current Limit during
can be set to correspond to the
ramping. See ramp-down time in
minimum output frequency of the
par. 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time.
motor shaft. The Speed Low Limit
tacc nnorm par .1 25

par .3 41 =
s
ref rpm
must not exceed the setting in

par. 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].
75
7 7
7 7
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
4-53 Warning Speed High
Range:
Range:
Application
Function:
[Applica-
Function:
the upper signal limit of the motor
Enter the maximum limit for motor
depend-
tion
speed. The Motor Speed High Limit can
speed, nHIGH, within the normal working
ent*
dependant] be set to correspond to the manufactur-
range of the frequency converter. Refer

to the drawing in this section.
ers maximum rated motor. The Motor

Speed High Limit must exceed the
setting in par. 4-11 Motor Speed Low
NOTE
Limit [RPM]. Only par. 4-11 Motor Speed
Any changes in par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

will reset the value in par. 4-53 Warning Speed High to
the same value as set in par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
[RPM].
If a different value is needed in par. 4-53 Warning Speed
High, it must be set after programming of
par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
Low Limit [RPM] or par. 4-12 Motor Speed

Low Limit [Hz] will be displayed depending on other parameters in the Main
Menu and depending on default
settings dependant on global location.
NOTE
Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the
inverter switching frequency (par. 14-01 Switching
Frequency).
4-56 Warning Feedback Low

Range:
-999999.999
ProcessCtrlU-
NOTE
Any changes in par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
will reset the value in par. 4-53 Warning Speed High to
the same value as set in par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
[RPM].
Function:
[Application Enter the lower feedback limit.
dependant]
nit*
When the feedback falls below this

limit, the display reads Feedb Low.
The signal outputs can be
programmed to produce a status
signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on
relay output 01 or 02.
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
4-57 Warning Feedback High
Range:
Range:
Application
Function:
[Applica-
Enter the maximum limit for motor
999999.999
speed. The Motor Speed High Limit can
ProcessCtrlU-
depend-
tion
ent*
dependant] be set to correspond to the manufactur-
Function:
[Application Enter the upper feedback limit.
dependant]
nit*
When the feedback exceeds this

limit, the display reads Feedb High.
ers recommended maximum of the
The signal outputs can be
motor shaft. The Motor Speed High Limit
programmed to produce a status
must exceed the in par. 4-12 Motor
signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on
Speed Low Limit [Hz]. Only
relay output 01 or 02.
par. 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or

par. 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] will
be displayed depending on other
parameters in the Main Menu and
depending on default settings dependant on global location.
4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up

Option:
Function:
[0] * Off
No function
[1]
Enabled Starts the Semi-Automatic Bypass set-up and

continue with the procedure described above.
NOTE
Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the
inverter switching frequency (par. 14-01 Switching
Frequency).
4-53 Warning Speed High
Range:
Application
dependent*
Function:
[Applica-
Enter the nHIGH value. When the motor
tion
speed exceeds this limit (nHIGH), the
dependant] display reads SPEED HIGH. The signal
outputs can be programmed to produce
a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and
on relay output 01 or 02. Programme
76
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
Option:
Same options and functions as par. 5-1*, except for Pulse input.
[0] *
[1]
Function:
Input
Defines terminal 27 as a digital input.
Output
Defines terminal 27 as a digital output.
Please note that this parameter cannot be adjusted while the

motor is running.
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
Option:
Function:
[0] *
Input
Defines terminal 29 as a digital input.
[1]
Output
Defines terminal 29 as a digital output.
Option:
Function:
[70]
Constant ON Actions
[78]
Reset Maint. Word
[120]
Lead Pump Start
[121]
Lead Pump Alternation
[130]
Pump 1 Interlock
[131]
Pump 2 Interlock
[132]
Pump 3 Interlock

Same options and functions as par. 5-1*.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
Option:
Function:
[0]
No operation
Same options and functions as par. 5-1*, except for Pulse input.
[1]
Reset
Option:
[2]
Coast inverse
[3]
Coast and reset inv
[5]
DC-brake inverse
Function:
[0] *
No operation
[1]
Reset
[2]
Coast inverse
[3]
Coast and reset inv
[5]
DC-brake inverse
[6]
Stop inverse
[7]
External interlock
[8]
Start
[9]
Latched start
[10]
Reversing
[11]
Start reversing
[14]
Jog
[15]
Preset reference on
[16]
Preset ref bit 0
[17]
Preset ref bit 1
[18]
Preset ref bit 2
[19]
Freeze reference
[20]
Freeze output
[21]
Speed up
[22]
Speed down
[23]
Set-up select bit 0
[24]
Set-up select bit 1
[34]
Ramp bit 0
[36]
Mains failure inverse
[37]
Fire Mode
[52]
Run permissive
[53]
Hand start
[54]
Auto start
[55]
DigiPot increase
[56]
DigiPot decrease
[57]
DigiPot clear
[62]
Reset Counter A
[65]
Reset Counter B
[66]
Sleep Mode
[68]
Timed Actions Disabled
[69]
Constant OFF Actions
[6]
Stop inverse
[7]
External interlock
[8]
Start
[9]
Latched start
[10]
Reversing
[11]
Start reversing
[14] *
Jog
[15]
Preset reference on
[16]
Preset ref bit 0
[17]
Preset ref bit 1
[18]
Preset ref bit 2
[19]
Freeze reference
[20]
Freeze output
[21]
Speed up
[22]
Speed down
[23]
Set-up select bit 0
[24]
Set-up select bit 1
[30]
Counter input
[32]
Pulse input
[34]
Ramp bit 0
[36]
Mains failure inverse
[37]
Fire Mode
[52]
Run permissive
[53]
Hand start
[54]
Auto start
[55]
DigiPot increase
[56]
DigiPot decrease
[57]
DigiPot clear
[60]
Counter A (up)
[61]
Counter A (down)
[62]
Reset Counter A
[63]
Counter B (up)
[64]
Counter B (down)
[65]
Reset Counter B
[66]
Sleep Mode
7 7
77
7 7
5-40 Function Relay
Same options and functions as par. 5-1*.
Array [8]
Option:
Function:
[68]
Timed Actions Disabled
[69]
Constant OFF Actions
[70]
Constant ON Actions
[78]
Reset Maint. Word
[120]
Lead Pump Start
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1]

Option MCB 105: Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7] and Relay 9 [8]).
Select options to define the function of the relays.
The selection of each mechanical relay is realised in an array
parameter.
Option:
Function:
[121]
[27]
[130]
Pump 1 Interlock
[28]
Pump 2 Interlock
[29]
Brake ready, no fault
Pump 3 Interlock
[30]
Brake fault (IGBT)
[131]
[132]
Torque limit & stop

Brake, no brake war
[35]
External Interlock
[36]
Control word bit 11
Option:
[37]
Control word bit 12
Function:
[0] * No Operation Same options and functions as par. 5-1*

Digital Inputs, except for Pulse input.

Option:
Function:
[0] * No Operation Same options and functions as par. 5-1*

Digital Inputs.
5-40 Function Relay

Array [8]
parameter.
Option:
Function:
[40]
Out of ref range
[41]
Below reference, low
[42]
Above ref, high
[45]
Bus ctrl.
[46]
Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout
[47]
Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout
[60]
Comparator 0
[61]
Comparator 1
[62]
Comparator 2
[63]
Comparator 3
[64]
Comparator 4
[65]
Comparator 5
[70]
Logic rule 0
[71]
Logic rule 1
[72]
Logic rule 2
[73]
Logic rule 3
[74]
Logic rule 4
[75]
Logic rule 5
[80]
SL digital output A
[81]
SL digital output B
[82]
SL digital output C
[83]
SL digital output D
[0] *
No operation
[1]
Control ready
[2]
Drive ready
[3]
Drive rdy/rem ctrl
[4]
Standby / no warning
[5] *
Running
[6]
Running / no warning
[84]
SL digital output E
[8]
Run on ref/no warn
[85]
SL digital output F
[9] *
Alarm
Default setting for relay 2.
Default setting for relay 1.
[160]
No alarm
Running reverse
[10]
Alarm or warning
[161]
[11]
At torque limit
[165]
Local ref active
[12]
Out of current range
[166]
Remote ref active
[13]
Below current, low
[167]
Start command act.
[14]
Above current, high
[168]
Hand / Off
[15]
Out of speed range
[169]
Auto mode
[16]
Below speed, low
[180]
Clock Fault
[17]
Above speed, high
[181]
Prev. Maintenance
[18]
Out of feedb. range
[190]
No-Flow
[19]
Below feedback, low
[191]
Dry Pump
[20]
Above feedback, high
[192]
End Of Curve
[21]
Thermal warning
[193]
Sleep Mode
[25]
Reverse
[194]
Broken Belt
Bus OK
[195]
Bypass Valve Control
[26]
78
5-40 Function Relay

Array [8]
parameter.
Option:
Function:
[196]
Fire Mode
[197]
Fire Mode was Act.
[198]
Drive Bypass
[211]
Cascade Pump 1
[212]
Cascade Pump 2
[213]
Cascade Pump 3
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function

Option:
Function:
Select the time-out function. The function set in
par. 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function will be
6-02 Fire Mode Live Zero Timeout Function
activated if the input signal on terminal 53 or 54
Option:
Function:
is below 50% of the value in par. 6-10 Terminal 53

Low Voltage, par. 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current,
The function set in par. 6-01 Live Zero Timeout

Function will be activated if the input signal
par. 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or
on analogue inputs is below 50% of the value
par. 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a time
defined in parameter group 6-1* to 6-6*
period defined in par. 6-00 Live Zero Timeout
"Terminal xx Low Current or Terminal xx
Time. If several time-outs occur simultaneously,
Low Voltage" for a time period defined in
the frequency converter prioritises the time-out
par. 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time.
functions as follows:
1.
2.
Par. 8-04 Control Timeout Function
[0] * Off
[1]
Freeze output
[2]
Stop
The output frequency of the frequency converter
[3]
Jogging
can be:
[4]
Max. speed
[1] frozen at the present value

[2] overruled to stop
[3] overruled to jog speed
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage

Range:
0.07 V*
[4] overruled to max. speed
Function:
[Application
dependant]
Freeze
output
[2]
Stop
[3]
Jogging
[4]
Max.
input scaling value should correspond to

the low reference/feedback value set in
trip
par. 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb.

Value.
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage

Range:
10.00 V*
Function:
[Application
dependant]
Enter the high voltage value. This

analog input scaling value should
correspond to the high reference/
speed
[5]
Enter the low voltage value. This analog
[5] overruled to stop with subsequent
[0] * Off
[1]
7 7
feedback value set in par. 6-15 Terminal
Stop and
53 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
trip
79
7 7
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage
Range:
Range:
Function:
4.00
[Application Enter the low current value. This reference
mA*
dependant]
Function:
0.07 V*
[Application
signal should correspond to the low
Enter the low voltage value. This analog
dependant]
input scaling value should correspond to
reference/feedback value, set in
the low reference/feedback value, set in
par. 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
par. 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb.
The value must be set at >2 mA in order to
Value.
activate the Live Zero Time-out Function in

par. 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage

Range:
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current

Range:
10.00 V*
Function:
20.00 mA*
[Application
dependant]
Function:
[Application
dependant]
Enter the high voltage value. This

analog input scaling value should
Enter the high current value
correspond to the high reference/
corresponding to the high reference/
feedback value set in par. 6-25 Terminal

54 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
feedback set in par. 6-15 Terminal 53

High Ref./Feedb. Value.
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current

6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range:
0.000*
Function:
[-999999.999 -
Enter the analog input scaling value
999999.999 ]
Range:
Function:
4.00
[Application Enter the low current value. This reference
mA*
dependant]
signal should correspond to the low
that corresponds to the low voltage/
reference/feedback value, set in
low current set in par. 6-10 Terminal
par. 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
53 Low Voltage and par. 6-12 Terminal
The value must be set at >2 mA in order to
53 Low Current.
activate the Live Zero Time-out Function in

par. 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
Function:
Application
dependent*
[-999999.999 999999.999 ]
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current
Enter the analog input scaling
Range:
value that corresponds to the
20.00 mA*
high voltage/high current value
Range:
10.000 s]
corresponding to the high reference/

feedback value set in
Voltage and par. 6-13 Terminal
par. 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
53 High Current.
Value.
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Function:
[0.001 -
dependant]
Enter the high current value
set in par. 6-11 Terminal 53 High
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant

0.001 s*
Function:
[Application
Range:
Enter the time constant. This is a first-order

digital low pass filter time constant for
0.000*
Function:
[-999999.999 -
999999.999 ]

that corresponds to the low voltage/
suppressing electrical noise in terminal 53.
low current value set in
A high time constant value improves
par. 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage and
dampening but also increases the time
par. 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current.
delay through the filter.

Range:
100.000*
6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero

Option:
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999 ]
Function:
voltage/high current value set in

par. 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage
Zero monitoring. E.g. to be used if the analog
and par. 6-23 Terminal 54 High
outputs are used as part of a de-central I/O system
Current.
related control functions, but feeding a Building

Management system with data).
Disabled
[1] * Enabled
80
that corresponds to the high
This parameter makes it possible to disable the Live
(e.g. when not as part of any frequency converter
[0]
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
6-50 Terminal 42 Output
Range:
Option:
Function:
0.001 s*
[0.001 10.000 s]
Enter the time constant. This is a first-order
[131]
digital low pass filter time constant for

suppressing electrical noise in terminal 54.
A high time constant value improves
[132]
Function:
Reference
Minimum Reference - Maximum
4-20mA
Reference
Feedback 4-20mA -200% to +200% of

par. 20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.
dampening but also increases the time

delay through the filter.
[133]

6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero

Option:
Function:
This parameter makes it possible to disable the Live
[134]
Motor cur.
0 - Inverter Max. Current (par. 16-37 Inv.
4-20mA
Max. Current)
Torq.0-lim 4-20
0 - Torque limit (par. 4-16 Torque Limit
mA
Motor Mode)
[135]
Torq.0-nom
4-20mA
0 - Motor rated torque
[136]
Power 4-20mA
0 - Motor rated power
[137]
Speed 4-20mA
0 - Speed High Limit (4-13 and 4-14)
[139]
Bus ctrl.
0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)
[140]
Bus ctrl. 4-20 mA
0 - 100%
[141]
Bus ctrl t.o.
0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)
Bus ctrl t.o.
0 - 100%
Zero monitoring. E.g. to be used if the analog

outputs are used as part of a de-central I/O system
(e.g. when not as part of any frequency converter
related control functions, but feeding a Building
Management System with data).
[0]
Disabled
[142]
[1] * Enabled
7 7
4-20mA
6-50 Terminal 42 Output
[143]
Ext. CL 1 4-20mA
0 - 100%
Option:
[144]
Ext. CL 2 4-20mA
0 - 100%
[145]
Ext. CL 3 4-20mA
0 - 100%
Function:
Select the function of Terminal 42 as an
analog current output. A motor current
of 20 mA corresponds to Imax.
[0] *
No operation
[100]
Output freq.
0 - 100 Hz, (0-20 mA)
0-100
[101]
[102]
Reference Min-
Minimum reference - Maximum
Max
reference, (0-20 mA)
Feedback +-200% -200% to +200% of
NOTE
Values for setting the Minimum Reference is found in
open loop par. 3-02 Minimum Reference and for closed
loop par. 20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. - values for
maximum reference for open loop is found in
par. 3-03 Maximum Reference and for closed loop
par. 20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb..
par. 20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.,
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale
(0-20 mA)
[103]
Motor cur. 0-Imax 0 - Inverter Max. Current (par. 16-37 Inv.

Max. Current), (0-20 mA)
[104]
Torque 0-Tlim
0 - Torque limit (par. 4-16 Torque Limit
Range:
0.00 %*
Function:
[0.00 200.00 %]
Motor Mode), (0-20 mA)

[105]
Torque 0-Tnom
0 - Motor rated torque, (0-20 mA)
[106]
Power 0-Pnom
0 - Motor rated power, (0-20 mA)
[107] * Speed 0-HighLim
Scale for the minimum output (0 or 4 mA)

of the analogue signal at terminal 42.
Set the value to be the percentage of the
full range of the variable selected in
par. 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.
0 - Speed High Limit (par. 4-13 Motor

Speed High Limit [RPM] and
par. 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]),
(0-20 mA)
[113]
Ext. Closed Loop
0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)
1
[114]
Ext. Closed Loop
0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)
2
[115]
Ext. Closed Loop
0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)
3
[130]
Out frq 0-100
0 - 100 Hz
4-20mA
81
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale

Range:
100.00
%*
Function:
[0.00 - Scale for the maximum output (20 mA) of the
200.00
analog signal at terminal 42.
%]
Set the value to be the percentage of the full

range of the variable selected in
par. 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.
7 7
It is possible to get a value lower than 20 mA at
full scale by programming values >100% by
using a formula as follows:
EXAMPLE 3:
Variable value= REFERENCE, range= Min ref - Max ref
Range needed for output= Min ref (0%) - Max ref (100%), 0-10
mA
Output signal 0 or 4 mA is needed at Min ref - set
par. 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 0%
Output signal 10 mA is needed at Max ref (100% of range) - set
par. 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 200%
(20 mA / 10 mA x 100%=200%).
20 mA / desired maximum current 100 %

20 mA
i .e . 10mA :
100 % = 200 %
10 mA
EXAMPLE 1:
Variable value= OUTPUT FREQUENCY, range = 0-100 Hz
Range needed for output = 0-50 Hz
Output signal 0 or 4 mA is needed at 0 Hz (0% of range) - set
Output signal 20 mA is needed at 50 Hz (50% of range) - set
14-01 Switching Frequency

Option:
Function:
Select the inverter switching frequency. Changing
the switching frequency can help to reduce
acoustic noise from the motor.
NOTE
The output frequency value of the
frequency converter must never exceed
1/10 of the switching frequency. When
the motor is running, adjust the switching frequency in par. 14-01 Switching
Frequency until the motor is as noiseless
as possible. See also par. 14-00 Switching
Pattern and the section Derating.
EXAMPLE 2:
Variable= FEEDBACK, range= -200% to +200%
Range needed for output= 0-100%
Output signal 0 or 4 mA is needed at 0% (50% of range) - set
Output signal 20 mA is needed at 100% (75% of range) - set
[0]
82
1.0 kHz
14-01 Switching Frequency
20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion
Option:
Option:
Function:
Function:
[1]
1.5 kHz
This parameter allows a conversion function to be
[2]
2.0 kHz
applied to Feedback 1.
[3]
2.5 kHz
[0] Linear
[4]
3.0 kHz
[5]
3.5 kHz
[1] Square
[6]
4.0 kHz
root
6.0 kHz
[9]
7.0 kHz
[11] 10.0 kHz
temper-
a pressure sensor. The temperature of the refrigerant
ature
is calculated using the following formula:

A2
Temperature = ( (
A3,
ln Pe + 1) A1)
[12] 12.0 kHz

[13] 14.0 kHz
where A1, A2 and A3 are refrigerant-specific

constants. The refrigerant must be selected in
[14] 16.0 kHz
20-00 Feedback 1 Source
par. 20-30 Refrigerant. Par. 20-21 Setpoint 1 through
Function:
Up to three different feedback signals
par. 20-23 Setpoint 3 allow the values of A1, A2 and

A3 to be entered for a refrigerant that is not listed in
can be used to provide the feedback
par. 20-30 Refrigerant.
signal for the frequency converters

PID Controller.
[3] Pressure Pressure to flow is used in applications where the air

to flow flow in a duct is to be controlled. The feedback
This parameter defines which input
signal is represented by a dynamic pressure
will be used as the source of the first
measurement (pitot tube).
feedback signal.
Flow = Duct Area
Analog input X30/11 and Analog
[0]
No function
[1]
Analog input 53
[2] *
Analog input 54
[3]
Pulse input 29
[4]
Pulse input 33
[7]
Analog input X30/11
[8]
Analog input X30/12
[9]
Analog Input X42/1
[10]
Analog Input X42/3
[11]
Analog Input X42/5
[15]
Analog Input X48/2
Air Density Factor
optional General Purpose I/O board.
See also par. 20-34 Duct 1 Area [m2] through

par. 20-38 Air Density Factor [%] for setting of duct
area and air density.
[4] Velocity
to flow
Velocity to flow is used in applications where the air

flow in a duct is to be controlled. The feedback
signal is represented by an air velocity measurement.
Flow = Duct Area Air Velocity

See also par. 20-34 Duct 1 Area [m2] through
par. 20-37 Duct 2 Area [in2] for setting of duct area.
20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit

Option:
Function:
This parameter determines the unit that is used for
this Feedback Source, prior to applying the
[101] Bus feedback 2

feedback conversion of par. 20-01 Feedback 1
Requires set up by MCT10 with
Conversion. This unit is not used by the PID Controller.
sensorless specific plug in.

[105] Sensorless Pressure
Dynamic Pressure
input X30/12 refer to inputs on the
[104] Sensorless Flow
sensor is used to provide flow feedback
[2] Pressure Pressure to temperature [2] is used in compressor

to
applications to provide temperature feedback using
[10] 8.0 kHz
Option:
Square root [1] is commonly used when a pressure

(( flow pressure )).
[7] * 5.0 kHz

[8]
Linear [0] has no effect on the feedback.
Requires set up by MCT10 with

sensorless specific plug in.
[0] *
[1]
NOTE
[5]
PPM
If a feedback is not used, its source must be set to No

Function [0]. Par. 20-20 Feedback Function determines
how the three possible feedbacks will be used by the
PID Controller.
[10]
1/min
[11]
RPM
[12]
Pulse/s
[20]
l/s
[21]
l/min
[22]
l/h
83
7 7
7 7
Option:
Option:
Function:
Function:
[23]
m3/s
See par. 20-00 Feedback 1 Source for
[24]
m3/min
details.
[25]
m3/h
[0] *
No function
[30]
kg/s
[1]
Analog input 53
[31]
kg/min
[2]
Analog input 54
[32]
kg/h
[3]
Pulse input 29
[33]
t/min
[4]
Pulse input 33
[34]
t/h
[7]
Analog input X30/11
[40]
m/s
[8]
Analog input X30/12
[41]
m/min
[9]
Analog Input X42/1
[45]
[10]
Analog Input X42/3
[60]
[11]
Analog Input X42/5
[70]
mbar
[15]
Analog Input X48/2
[71]
bar
[72]
Pa
[73]
kPa
[74]
m WG
[75]
mm Hg
[80]
kW
Option:
Function:
[120] GPM
See par. 20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion for details.
[121] gal/s
[122] gal/min
[0] * Linear
[123] gal/h
[124] CFM
[125] ft3/s
[126] ft3/min
[1]
Square root
[2]
Pressure to temperature
[3]
Pressure to flow
[4]
Velocity to flow
[127] ft3/h
[130] lb/s
[131] lb/min
Option:
[132] lb/h
Function:
See par. 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit for details.
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
Option:
[160] F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in2
[0] *
No function
[172] in WG
[1]
Analog input 53
[173] ft WG
[2]
Analog input 54
[174] in Hg
[3]
Pulse input 29
[180] HP
[4]
Pulse input 33
NOTE
[7]
Analog input X30/11
This parameter is only available when using pressure to

temperature feedback conversion.
If the choice Linear [0] is selected in par. 20-01 Feedback
1 Conversion, then the setting of any choice in
par. 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit does not matter as
conversion will be one-to-one.
[8]
Analog input X30/12
[9]
Analog Input X42/1
[10]
Analog Input X42/3
[11]
Analog Input X42/5
[15]
Analog Input X48/2

84
Function:
See par. 20-00 Feedback 1 Source for
details.
NOTE

Option:
Function:
See par. 20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion for details.
[0] * Linear
[1]
Square root
[2]
Pressure to temperature
[3]
Pressure to flow
[4]
Velocity to flow
20-20 Feedback Function

Option:

Option:
The dynamics of the PID controller will depend on the

value set in this parameter. Please see also par. 20-93 PID
Proportional Gain.
Par. 20-13 and par. 20-14 also determine the feedback
range when using feedback for display readout with
par. 1-00 Configuration Mode set for Open Loop [0].
Same condition as above.
Function:
feedbacks will be used to control the output

frequency of the frequency converter.
20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit

Option:
[0]
Sum
Function:
ProcessCtrlUnit*
Any unused feedbacks must be set to No

Function in par. 20-00 Feedback 1 Source,
par. 20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or
par. 20-06 Feedback 3 Source.
Function:
[Applica-
7 7
NOTE
20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb.

0.000
Sum [0] sets up the PID Controller to use the sum

of Feedback 1, Feedback 2 and Feedback 3 as the
feedback.
Range:
Function:
This parameter determines how the three possible
Enter the desired minimum value for
tion
depend-
the remote reference when operating
ant]
for Closed Loop [3] operation. Units are
with par. 1-00 Configuration Mode set

The sum of Setpoint 1 and any other references
set in par. 20-12 Reference/Feedback
that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*) will be used
Unit.
as the PID Controllers set-point reference.
Minimum feedback will be -200% of

either the value set in
par. 20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. or
[1]
Difference Difference [1] sets up the PID controller to use the

difference between Feedback 1 and Feedback 2 as
the feedback. Feedback 3 will not be used with
in par. 20-14 Maximum Reference/
this selection. Only Setpoint 1 will be used. The
Feedb., which ever numeric value is the

highest.
sum of Setpoint 1 and any other references that

are enabled (see par. group 3-1*) will be used as
the PID controllers set-point reference.
NOTE
If operating with par. 1-00 Configuration Mode set for
Open Loop [0], par. 3-02 Minimum Reference must be
used.
[2]
Average
Average [2] sets up the PID Controller to use the

average of Feedback 1, Feedback 2 and Feedback
3 as the feedback.
NOTE
20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.
Range:
100.000
Function:
[Applica-
Enter the maximum reference/
ProcessCtrlU-
tion
feedback for closed loop operation.
nit*
dependant]
The setting determines the highest

value obtainable by summing all
reference sources for closed loop
operation. The setting determines

par. 20-06 Feedback 3 Source. The sum of
Setpoint 1 and any other references that
are enabled (see par. group 3-1*) will be
used as the PID Controllers set-point
reference.
100% feedback in open and closed

loop (total feedback range: -200% to
+200%).
NOTE
If operating with par. 1-00 Configuration Mode set for
Open Loop [0], par. 3-03 Maximum Reference must be
used.
85
7 7
Option:
Option:
[3]
Minimum
Function:
Minimum [3] sets up the PID Controller to
[6]
Multi
Multi-setpoint maximum [6] sets up the PID
compare Feedback 1, Feedback 2 and Feedback 3
Setpoint
Controller to calculate the difference between
and use the lowest value as the feedback.
Max
Feedback 1 and Setpoint 1, Feedback 2 and

Setpoint 2, and Feedback 3 and Setpoint 3. It will
NOTE
use the feedback/setpoint pair in which the

par. 20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Only
setpoint 1 will be used. The sum of
Setpoint 1 and any other references that
are enabled (see par. group 3-1*) will be
used as the PID Controllers setpoint
reference.
[4]
Maximum
Function:
feedback is farthest above its corresponding

setpoint reference. If all feedback signals are
below their corresponding setpoints, the PID
Controller will use the feedback/setpoint pair in
which the difference between the feedback and
the setpoint reference is the least.
NOTE
If only two feedback signals are used,
the feedback that is not to be used must
be set to No Function in
par. 20-00 Feedback 1 Source,
par. 20-03 Feedback 2 Source or
par. 20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Note that
each setpoint reference will be the sum
of its respective parameter value
(par. 20-21 Setpoint 1, par. 20-22 Setpoint
2 and par. 20-23 Setpoint 3) and any
other references that are enabled (see
parameter group 3-1*).
Maximum [4] sets up the PID Controller to

compare Feedback 1, Feedback 2 and Feedback 3
and use the highest value as the feedback.
NOTE
Only Setpoint 1 will be used. The sum of Setpoint
1 and any other references that are enabled (see
[5]
par. group 3-1*) will be used as the PID Control-
NOTE
lers setpoint reference.
Any unused feedback must be set to No function in its

Feedback Source parameter: Par. 20-00 Feedback 1
Source, par. 20-03 Feedback 2 Source or
Multi
Setpoint
Multi-setpoint minimum [5] sets up the PID

Controller to calculate the difference between
Min
Feedback 1 and Setpoint 1, Feedback 2 and

Setpoint 2, and Feedback 3 and Setpoint 3. It will
use the feedback/setpoint pair in which the
feedback is the farthest below its corresponding
setpoint reference. If all feedback signals are
above their corresponding setpoints, the PID
Controller will use the feedback/setpoint pair in
which the difference between the feedback and
setpoint is the least.
NOTE
If only two feedback signals are used,
the feedback that is not to be used must
be set to No Function in
par. 20-00 Feedback 1 Source,
par. 20-03 Feedback 2 Source or
par. 20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Note that
each setpoint reference will be the sum
of its respective parameter value
(par. 20-21 Setpoint 1, par. 20-22 Setpoint
2 and par. 20-23 Setpoint 3) and any
other references that are enabled (see
par. group 3-1*).
86
The feedback resulting from the function selected in

par. 20-20 Feedback Function will be used by the PID Controller
to control the output frequency of the frequency converter.
This feedback can also be shown on the frequency converters
display, be used to control a frequency converter's analog
output, and be transmitted over various serial communication
protocols.
The frequency converter can be configured to handle multi
zone applications. Two different multi zone applications are
supported:
Multi zone, single setpoint

Multi zone, multi setpoint
The difference between the two is illustrated by the following

examples:
Example 1 Multi zone, single setpoint
In an office building, a VAV (variable air volume) VLT HVAC
Drive system must ensure a minimum pressure at selected
VAV boxes. Due to the varying pressure losses in each duct,
the pressure at each VAV box cannot be assumed to be the
same. The minimum pressure required is the same for all VAV
boxes. This control method can be set up by setting
par. 20-20 Feedback Function to option [3], Minimum, and
entering the desired pressure in par. 20-21 Setpoint 1. The PID
Controller will increase the speed of the fan if any one

feedback is below the setpoint and decrease the speed of the
fan if all feedbacks are above the setpoint.
7 7
Example 2 Multi zone, multi setpoint

The previous example can be used to illustrate the use of multi
zone, multi setpoint control. If the zones require different
pressures for each VAV box, each setpoint may be specified in
par. 20-21 Setpoint 1, par. 20-22 Setpoint 2 and
par. 20-23 Setpoint 3. By selecting Multi setpoint minimum, [5],
in par. 20-20 Feedback Function, the PID Controller will
increase the speed of the fan if any one of the feedbacks is
below its setpoint and decrease the speed of the fan if all
feedbacks are above their individual setpoints.
20-22 Setpoint 2
Range:
Function:
frequency converters PID Controller. See the description of
Feedback Function,
par. 20-20 Feedback Function.
NOTE
The set-point reference entered here is added to any
other references that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*).
20-21 Setpoint 1
Range:
0.000
Function:
[-999999.999 - Setpoint 1 is used in Closed Loop
20-70 Closed Loop Type

Option:
Function:
ProcessCtr-
999999.999
Mode to enter a setpoint reference
This parameter defines the application
lUnit*
ProcessCtrlU-
that is used by the frequency
response. The default mode should be
nit]
converters PID Controller. See the
sufficient for most applications. If the
description of par. 20-20 Feedback
application response speed is known, it can
Function.
be selected here. This will decrease the time
NOTE
needed for carrying out PID autotuning. The
Setpoint reference entered

here is added to any other
references that are enabled
(see par. group 3-1*).
setting has no impact on the value of the
20-22 Setpoint 2
Range:
0.000
autotuning sequence.
[0] * Auto
[1]
Fast Pressure
[2]
Slow Pressure
[3]
Function:
[-999999.999 - Setpoint 2 is used in Closed Loop
ProcessCtrlU- 999999.999
nit*
tuned parameters and is used only for the
Mode to enter a setpoint
Fast Temperature
[4]
Slow Temperature
ProcessCtrlUnit] reference that may be used by the
87
20-71 PID Performance
20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control
Option:
Option:
Function:
[0] * Normal Normal setting of this parameter will be suitable for
[0] * Normal Normal [0] causes the frequency converters output
pressure control in fan systems.

[1]
Fast
frequency to decrease when the feedback is greater

than the setpoint reference. This is common for
Fast setting would generally be used in pumping
pressure-controlled supply fan and pump applica-
systems, where a faster control response is desirable.
20-72 PID Output Change

Range:
0.10*
[0.01 0.50 ]
Function:
tions.
[1]
Inverse Inverse [1] causes the frequency converters output

frequency to increase when the feedback is greater
Function:
than the setpoint reference. This is common for
This parameter sets the magnitude of step change

during autotuning. The value is a percentage of
temperature-controlled cooling applications, such as

cooling towers.
full speed. I.e. if maximum output frequency

inpar. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]/
par. 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] is set to 50Hz,
20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]
0.10 is 10% of 50Hz, which is 5Hz. This parameter
Range:
should be set to a value resulting in feedback

changes of between 10% and 20% for best tuning
Application
[Application
When the frequency converter is first

started, it initially ramps up to this output
accuracy.
depend-
depend-
speed in Open Loop Mode, following the
ent*
ant]
20-73 Minimum Feedback Level
active Ramp Up Time. When the output

speed programmed here is reached, the
Range:
frequency converter will automatically
7 7
-999999.000
ProcessCtrlUnit*
Function:
Function:
[Applica-
switch to Closed Loop Mode and the PID

Controller will begin to function. This is
The minimum allowable feedback
tion
level should be entered here in User
dependant] units as defined in
useful in applications in which the driven

load must first quickly accelerate to a
par. 20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit. If
minimum speed when it is started.
the level falls below

par. 20-73 Minimum Feedback Level,
NOTE
autotuning is aborted and an error
This parameter will only be visible

if par. 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set
to [0], RPM.
message will appear on the LCP.
20-74 Maximum Feedback Level

Range:
Function:
999999.000
ProcessCtrlU-
[Application
The maximum allowable feedback

level should be entered here in User
nit*
dependant] units as defined in
20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz]

Range:
Applica-
Function:
[Applica-
When the frequency converter is first
par. 20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit. If

the level rises above
tion
tion
started, it initially ramps up to this output
depend-
depend-
frequency in Open Loop Mode, following
par. 20-74 Maximum Feedback Level,
ent*
ant]
the active Ramp Up Time. When the

output frequency programmed here is
autotuning is aborted and an error

message will appear on the LCP.
reached, the frequency converter will

automatically switch to Closed Loop Mode
and the PID Controller will begin to
20-79 PID Autotuning

Option:
function. This is useful in applications in
Function:
which the driven load must first quickly
This parameter starts the PID autotuning sequence.
accelerate to a minimum speed when it is
Once the autotuning has successfully completed

and the settings have been accepted or rejected by
started.
the user, by pressing [OK] or [Cancel] buttons on
NOTE
the LCP at the end of tuning, this parameter is reset

to [0] Disabled.
This parameter will only be visible

if par. 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set
to [1], Hz.
[0] * Disabled
[1]
Enabled
20-93 PID Proportional Gain

Range:
0.50*
88
Function:
[0.00 - 10.00 ]
If (Error x Gain) jumps with a value equal to what is set in

par. 20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. the PID controller will try
to change the output speed equal to what is set in
par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] / par. 4-14 Motor Speed
High Limit [Hz] but in practice of course limited by this setting.
The proportional band (error causing output to change from
0-100%) can be calculated by means of the formula:
1
(Max Reference )
( Proportional
Gain )
NOTE
Always set the desired for par. 20-14 Maximum

Reference/Feedb. before setting the values for the PID
controller in parameter group 20-9*.
20.00
s*
Auto Set Up must be done when the system has

reached normal operating temperature!
NOTE
It is important that the par. 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
[RPM] or par. 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] is set to
the max. operational speed of the motor!
It is important to do the Auto Set-up before configuring
the integrated PI Contoller as settings will be reset when
changing from Closed to Open Loop in par. 1-00 Configuration Mode.
NOTE
Carry out the tuning with the same settings in
par. 1-03 Torque Characteristics, as for operation after the
tuning.
20-94 PID Integral Time

Range:
NOTE
Function:
[0.01 Over time, the integrator accumulates a
10000.00 s] contribution to the output from the PID
controller as long as there is a deviation
between the Reference/Setpoint and
feedback signals. The contribution is propor-
7 7
22-21 Low Power Detection

Option:
Function:
[0] * Disabled
tional to the size of the deviation. This ensures
[1]
Enabled
If selecting Enabled, the Low Power Detection

commissioning must be carried out in order to set
that the deviation (error) approaches zero.

Quick response on any deviation is obtained
the parameters in group 22-3* for proper

operation!
when the integral time is set to a low value.

Setting it too low, however, may cause the
control to become unstable.
The value set, is the time needed for the
integrator to add the same contribution as
the proportional part for a certain deviation.
22-22 Low Speed Detection

Option:
Function:
[0] * Disabled
[1]
Enabled
Select Enabled for detecting when the motor
If the value is set to 10,000, the controller will
operates with a speed as set in par. 4-11 Motor
act as a pure proportional controller with a Pband based on the value set in par. 20-93 PID
Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par. 4-12 Motor Speed Low

Limit [Hz].
Proportional Gain. When no deviation is

present, the output from the proportional
controller will be 0.
22-23 No-Flow Function

Common actions for Low Power Detection and Low Speed
Detection (Individual selections not possible).
22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up
Option:
Start of auto set-up of power data for No-Flow Power tuning.
[0] * Off
Option:
[1]
Function:
Function:
Sleep Mode The drive will enter Sleep Mode and stop when
[0] * Off
a No Flow condition is detected. See parameter
[1]
group 22-4* for programming options for Sleep
Enabled When set for Enabled, an auto set up sequence is
Mode.
activated, automatically setting speed to approx. 50

and 85% of rated motor speed (par. 4-13 Motor
[2]
Warning
The drive will continue to run, but activate a
Speed High Limit [RPM], par. 4-14 Motor Speed High
No-Flow Warning [W92]. A drive digital output
Limit [Hz]). At those two speeds, the power
or a serial communication bus can communi-
consumption is automatically measured and stored.
cate a warning to other equipment.
Before enabling Auto Set Up:

1.
2.
[3]
Alarm
The drive will stop running and activate a No-
Close valve(s) in order to create a no flow
Flow Alarm [A 92]. A drive digital output or a
condition
serial communication bus can communicate an
The frequency converter must be set for
alarm to other equipment.
Open Loop (par. 1-00 Configuration Mode).

Note that it is important also to set
par. 1-03 Torque Characteristics.
89
NOTE
NOTE
Do not set par. 14-20 Reset Mode, to [13] Infinite auto

reset, when par. 22-23 No-Flow Functionis set to [3]
Alarm. Doing so will cause the drive to continuously
cycle between running and stopping when a No Flow
condition is detected.
If the drive is equipped with a constant speed bypass

with an automatic bypass function that starts the bypass
if the drive experiences a persistent alarm condition, be
sure to disable the bypasss automatic bypass function,
if [2] Alarm or [3] Man. Reset Alarm is selected as the Dry
Pump Function.
NOTE
if [3] Alarm is selected as the No-Flow Function.
22-24 No-Flow Delay
Range:
10 s*
Range:
10 s*
Function:
[0 - 600 s] Defines for how long the Dry Pump condition
must be active before activating Warning or
Alarm
22-40 Minimum Run Time
Function:
Range:
[1 - 600 s] Set the time Low Power/Low Speed must stay
7 7
22-27 Dry Pump Delay
10 s*
Function:
[0 - 600 s] Set the desired minimum running time for the
detected to activate signal for actions. If

detection disappears before run out of the
motor after a start command (digital input or

Bus) before entering Sleep Mode.
timer, the timer will be reset.
22-41 Minimum Sleep Time

22-26 Dry Pump Function
Range:
Select desired action for dry pump operation.
Option:
10 s*
Function:
[0 - 600 s] Set the desired Minimum Time for staying in
Function:
Sleep Mode. This will override any wake up

conditions.
[0] * Off
[1]
[2]
[3]
Warning
Alarm
The drive will continue to run, but activate a

Dry pump warning [W93]. A drive digital
22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM]
output or a serial communication bus can
Range:
Function:
communicate a warning to other equipment.
Application
The drive will stop running and activate a Dry

pump alarm [A93]. A drive digital output or a
dependent* tion
[Applicadependant]
has been set for RPM (parameter not

visible if Hz selected). Only to be used if
serial communication bus can communicate
par. 1-00 Configuration Mode is set for
an alarm to other equipment.
Open Loop and speed reference is
Man. Reset
The drive will stop running and activate a Dry
Alarm
pump alarm [A93]. A drive digital output or a
applied by an external controller.

Set the reference speed at which the
Sleep Mode should be cancelled.
serial communication bus can communicate

an alarm to other equipment.
22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz]

Range:
NOTE
Low Power Detection must be Enabled (par. 22-21 Low
Power Detection) and commissioned (using either
parameter group 22-3*, No Flow Power Tuning, or
par. 22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up) in order to use Dry
Pump Detection.
Application
Function:
[Applica-
To be used if par. 0-02 Motor Speed Unit,
depend-
tion
has been set for Hz (parameter not
ent*
dependant]
visible if RPM selected). Only to be used

if par. 1-00 Configuration Mode, is set for
Open Loop and speed reference is
applied by an external controller
controlling the pressure.
NOTE
reset, when par. 22-26 Dry Pump Function is set to [2]
Alarm. Doing so will cause the drive to continuously
cycle between running and stopping when a Dry Pump
90
To be used if par. 0-02 Motor Speed Unit
Set the reference speed at which the

Sleep Mode should be cancelled.
22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference
22-60 Broken Belt Function
Range:
Selects the action to be performed if the Broken Belt condition is
10 %*
Function:
[0 - 100
%]
Only to be used if par. 1-00 Configuration Mode
detected
is set for Closed Loop and the integrated PI
Option:
Function:
controller is used for controlling the pressure.
communication bus can communicate an alarm to

other equipment.
Set the pressure drop allowed in percentage of

set point for the pressure (Pset) before cancel-
NOTE
ling the Sleep Mode.
NOTE
If used in application where the integrated PI controller
is set for inverse control (e.g. cooling tower applications)
in par. 20-71 PID Performance, the value set in
par. 22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference will automatically
be added.
22-45 Setpoint Boost
Range:
0
%*
Function:
[-100 - Only to be used if par. 1-00 Configuration Mode, is

100 %] set for Closed Loop and the integrated PI controller

reset, when par. 22-60 Broken Belt Function is set to [2]
Trip. Doing so will cause the drive to continuously cycle
between running and stopping when a broken belt
NOTE
if [2] Trip is selected as the Broken Belt Function.
is used. In systems with e.g. constant pressure

control, it is advantageous to increase the system
pressure before the motor is stopped. This will
extend the time in which the motor is stopped and
help to avoid frequent start/stop.
Set the desired over pressure/temperature in
percentage of set point for the pressure (Pset)/
temperature before entering the Sleep Mode.
If setting for 5%, the boost pressure will be
Pset*1.05. The negative values can be used for e.g.
22-61 Broken Belt Torque

Range:
10 %*
Function:
[0 - 100 %] Sets the broken belt torque as a percentage
of the rated motor torque.
22-62 Broken Belt Delay

Range:
10 s
Function:
[0 - 600 s] Sets the time for which the Broken Belt
cooling tower control where a negative change is
conditions must be active before carrying out
needed.
the action selected in par. 22-60 Broken Belt

Function.
22-46 Maximum Boost Time

Range:
60 s*
22-75 Short Cycle Protection
Function:
[0 - 600 Only to be used if par. 1-00 Configuration Mode is

s]
set for Closed Loop and the integrated PI controller is used for controlling the pressure.
Set the maximum time for which boost mode will
Option:
[0] * Disabled Timer set in par. 22-76 Interval between Starts is

disabled.
[1]
Enabled
be allowed. If the set time is exceeded, Sleep

Mode will be entered, not waiting for the set boost
pressure to be reached.
Function:
Timer set in par. 22-76 Interval between Starts is

enabled.
22-76 Interval between Starts

Range:
22-60 Broken Belt Function
Application
Selects the action to be performed if the Broken Belt condition is
dependent*
Function:
[Application
dependant]
detected
Option:
time between two starts. Any

normal start command (Start/Jog/
Function:
Freeze) will be disregarded until

the timer has expired.
[0] * Off
[1]
Sets the time desired as minimum
Warning The drive will continue to run, but activate a Broken

Belt Warning [W95]. A drive digital output or a
serial communication bus can communicate a
warning to other equipment.
[2]
Trip
The drive will stop running and activate a Broken

Belt alarm [A 95]. A drive digital output or a serial
91
7 7
7 7
22-77 Minimum Run Time
22-82 Work Point Calculation
Range:
Option:
0 s*
Function:
Function:
[Application Sets the time desired as minimum run time

dependant]
after a normal start command (Start/Jog/

Freeze). Any normal stop command will be
disregarded until the set time has expired. The
timer will start counting following a normal
start command (Start/Jog/Freeze).
The timer will be overridden by a Coast
(Inverse) or an External Interlock command.
NOTE
Does not work in cascade mode.
From the data sheet showing characteristics for the

specific equipment at different speeds, simply
22-80 Flow Compensation

Option:
reading across from the HDESIGN point and the
Function:
QDESIGN point allows us to find point A, which is the
[0] * Disabled [0] Disabled: Set-Point compensation not active.

[1]
Enabled
System Design Working Point. The pump characteristics at this point should be identified and the
[1] Enabled:Set-Point compensation is active.
associated speed programmed. Closing the valves
Enabling this parameter allows the Flow Compen-
and adjusting the speed until HMIN has been
sated Setpoint operation.
achieved allows the speed at the no flow point to be

identified.
22-81 Square-linear Curve Approximation

Range:
100 %*
Adjustment of par. 22-81 Square-linear Curve Approx-
Function:
imation then allows the shape of the control curve
[0 - 100 %] Example 1:
to be adjusted infinitely.
Adjustment of this parameter allows the
Example 2:
shape of the control curve to be adjusted.
Speed at System Design Working Point is not
0 = Linear
known: Where the Speed at System Design Working
100% = Ideal shape (theoretical).
Point is unknown, another reference point on the

control curve needs to be determined by means of
NOTE
the data sheet. By looking at the curve for the rated
Not visible when running in cascade.
speed and plotting the design pressure (HDESIGN,

Point C) the flow at that pressure QRATED can be
determined. Similarly, by plotting the design flow
(QDESIGN, Point D). the pressure HD at that flow can be
determined. Knowing these two points on the pump
curve, along with HMIN as described above, allows
the frequency converter to calculate the reference
point B and thus to plot the control curve which will
also include the System design Working Point A.

Option:
Function:
Example 1: Speed at System Design Working Point is
known:
[0] Disabled Disabled [0]: Work Point Calculation not active. To be
*
used if speed at design point is known (see table

above).
92
22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM]
Option:
Range:
[1] Enabled
Function:
Function:
Enabled [1] : Work Point Calculation is active.
par. 0-02 Motor Speed Unit then
Enabling this parameter allows the calculation of the
par. 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]
unknown System Design Working Point at 50/60 Hz
should also be used.
speed, from the input data set in par. 22-83 Speed at

No-Flow [RPM] par. 22-84 Speed at No-Flow [Hz],
22-86 Speed at Design Point [Hz]
par. 22-87 Pressure at No-Flow Speed,
Range:
par. 22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed, par. 22-89 Flow at

Design Point and par. 22-90 Flow at Rated Speed.
22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]

Range:
Function:
Application
[Applica-
depend-
tion
ent*
dependant]
Only visible when par. 22-82 Work Point

Calculation is set to Disable. The speed
of the motor at which the System
Function:
Design Working Point is achieved should
Application
[Application
depend-
dependant] zero and minimum pressure HMIN is
ent*
Resolution 0.033 Hz.
Resolution 1 RPM.
The speed of the motor at which flow Is
be entered here in Hz. Alternatively, the

speed in RPM can be entered in
par. 22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM]. If
achieved should be entered here in RPM.
it has been decided to use Hz in
Alternatively, the speed in Hz can be

entered in par. 22-84 Speed at No-Flow
par. 0-02 Motor Speed Unit, then
[Hz]. If it has been decided to use RPM in
should also be used.
7 7
par. 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]

par. 22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM]
should also be used. Closing the valves
and reducing the speed until minimum
pressure HMIN is achieved will determine
22-87 Pressure at No-Flow Speed

Range:
0.000*
Function:
[Application
dependant]
this value.
Enter the pressure HMIN corresponding to Speed at No Flow in

Reference/Feedback Units.
22-84 Speed at No-Flow [Hz]

Range:
Applica-
Please also see par. 22-82 Work Point Calculation point D.
Function:
[Applica-
tion
tion
depend-
dependant]
ent*
Resolution 0.033 Hz.

The speed of the motor at which flow
has effectively stopped and minimum
pressure HMIN is achieved should be
22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed

Range:
Function:
999999.999*
[Application
dependant]
entered here in Hz. Alternatively, the
the Pressure at Rated Speed, in

Reference/Feedback Units. This
speed in RPM can be entered in
value can be defined using the
par. 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]. If it
pump datasheet.
has been decided to use Hz in

Enter the value corresponding to
Please also see par. 22-82 Work Point Calculation point A.
par. 22-86 Speed at Design Point [Hz]

should also be used. Closing the valves
and reducing the speed until minimum
pressure HMIN is achieved will determine
this value.
22-89 Flow at Design Point

Range:
0.000*
Function:
[0.000 - 999999.999 ] Enter the value corresponding to
the Flow at Design Point. No units
22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM]

Range:
Application
necessary.
Function:
[Applica-
depend-
tion
ent*
dependant]
Resolution 1 RPM.
Only visible when par. 22-82 Work Point
Calculation is set to Disable. The speed
of the motor at which the System
Design Working Point is achieved should
Please also see par. 22-82 Work Point Calculation point C.

22-90 Flow at Rated Speed
Range:
0.000*
Function:
[0.000 - 999999.999 ] Enter the value corresponding to
the speed in Hz can be entered in
Flow at Rated Speed. This value can

be defined using the pump
par. 22-86 Speed at Design Point [Hz]. If it
datasheet.
be entered here in RPM. Alternatively,
has been decided to use RPM in
93
7 7
7.3.1 Parameter Set-Up

Group
Title
Function
0-
Operation and Display
Parameters used to program the fundamental functions of the frequency converter and the LCP
including: selection of language; selection of which variables are displayed at each position in the
display (e.g. static duct pressure or condenser water return temperature can be displayed with the
setpoint in small digits in the top row and feedback in large digits in the centre of the dispay);
enabling/disabling of the LCP keys/buttons; passwords for the LCP; upload and download of
commissioned parameters to/from the LCP and setting the built in clock.
1-
Load / Motor
Parameters used to configure the frequency converter for the specific application and motor including: open or closed loop operation; type of application such as compressor, fan or centrifual pump;
motor nameplate data; auto-tuning of the drive to the motor for optimum performance; flying start
(typically used for fan applications) and motor thermal protection.
2-
Brakes
Parameters used to configure braking functions of the frequency converter which although not
common in many HVAC applications, can be useful on special fan applications. Parameters including: DC braking; dymamic/resistor braking and over voltage control (which provides automatic
adjustment of the deceleration rate (auto-ramping) to avoid tripping when decelerating large
inertia fans)
3-
Reference / Ramps
Parameters used to program the minimum and maximum reference limits of speed (RPM/Hz) in
open loop or in actual units when operating in closed loop); digital/preset references; jog speed;
definition of the source of each reference (e.g. which analog input the reference signal is connected
to); ramp up and down times and digital potentiometer settings.
4-
Limits / Warnings
Parameters used to program limits and warnings of operation including: allowable motor direction;
minimum and maximum motor speeds (e.g. in pump applications it is typical to program a
minimum speed to approx 30-40% to ensure pump seals are adequately lubricated at all times,
avoid cavitation and ensure adequate head is produced at all times to create flow); torque and
current limits to protect the pump, fan or compressor driven by the motor; warnings for low/high
current, speed, reference, and feedback; missing motor phase protection; speed bypass frequencies
including semi-automatic setup of these frequencies (e.g. to avoid resonance conditions on cooling
tower and other fans).
5-
Digital In / Out
Parameters used to program the functions of all digital inputs, digital outputs, relay outputs, pulse
inputs and pulse outputs for terminals on the control card and all option cards.
6-
Analog In / Out
Parameters used to program the functions associated with all analog inputs and analog outputs for
the terminals on the control card and General Purpose I/O option (MCB 101) (note: NOT Analog I/O
option MCB 109, see parameter group 26-00) including: analog input live zero timeout function
(which for example can be used to command a cooling tower fan to operate at full speed if the
condenser water return sensor fails); scaling of the analog input signals (for example to match the
analog input to the mA and pressure range of a static duct pressure sensor); filter time constant to
filter out electrical noise on the analog signal which can sometimes occur when long cables are
installed; function and scaling of the analog outputs (for example to provide an analog output
representing motor current or kW to an analog input of a DDC controller) and to configure the
analog outputs to be controlled by the BMS via a high level interface (HLI) (e.g. to control a chilled
water valve) including ability to define a default value of these outputs in the event of the HLI
failing.
8-
Communication and
Parameters used for configuring and monitoring functions associated with the serial communica-
Options
tions / high level interface to the frequency converter
Profibus
Parameters only applicable when a Profibus option is installed.
10-
CAN Fieldbus
Parameters only applicable when a DeviceNet option is installed.
11-
LonWorks
Parameters only applicable when a Lonworks option is installed.
9-
94
Group
Title
13-
Smart Logic Controller
Function
Parameters used to configure the built in Smart Logic Controller (SLC) which can be used for simple
functions such as comparators (e.g. if running above xHz, activate output relay), timers (e.g. when a
start signal is applied, first activate output relay to open supply air damper and wait x seconds
before ramping up) or a more complex sequence of user defined actions executed by the SLC when
the associated user defined event is evaluated as TRUE by the SLC. (For example, initiate an
economiser mode in a simple AHU cooling application control scheme where there is no BMS. For
such an application the SLC can monitor the outside air relative humidity and if it is below a defined
value, the supply air temperature setpoint could be automatically increased. With the frequency
converter monitoring the outside air relative humidity and supply air temperature via its analog
inputs and controlling the chilled water valve via one of the extended PI(D) loops and an analog
output, it would then modulate that valve to maintain a higher supply air temperature). The SLC
can often replace the need for other external control equipment.
14-
Special Functions
Parameters used to configure special functions of the frequency converter including: setting of the
switching frequency to reduce audible noise from the motor (sometimes required for fan applications); kinetic back-up function (especially useful for critical applications in semi-conductor installations where performance under mains dip/mains loss is important); mains imbalance protection;
automatic reset (to avoid the need for a manual reset of Alarms); energy optimisation parameters
(which typically do not need changing but enable fine tuning of this automatic function (if necessary) ensuring the frequency converter and motor combination operate at their optimum efficiency at
full and partial load conditions) and auto-derating functions (which enable the frequency converter
to continue operation at reduced performance under extreme operating conditions ensuring
maximum up time).
15-
FC Information
Parameters providing operating data and other drive information including: operating and running
hour counters; kWh counter; resetting of the running and kWh counters; alarm/fault log (where the
past 10 alarms are logged along with any associated value and time) and drive and option card
indentification parameters such as code number and software version.
16-
Data Readouts
Read only parameters which display the status/value of many operating variables which can be
displayed on the LCP or viewed in this parameter group. These parameters can be particularly
18-
Info & Readouts
Read only parameters which display the last 10 prevantative maintenance log items, actions and
useful during commissioning when interfacing with a BMS via a high level interface.
time and the value of analog inputs and outputs on the Analog I/O option card which can be particularly useful during commissioning when interfacing with a BMS via a high level interface.
20-
FC Closed Loop
Parameters used to configure the closed loop PI(D) controller which controls the speed of the
pump, fan or compressor in closed loop mode including: defining where each of the 3 possible
feedback signals come from (e.g. which analog input or the BMS HLI); conversion factor for each of
the feedback signals (e.g. where a pressure signal is used for indication of flow in an AHU or
converting from pressure to temperature in a compressor application); engineering unit for the
reference and feedback (e.g. Pa, kPa, m Wg, in Wg, bar, m3/s, m3/h, C, F etc); the function (e.g.
sum, difference, average, minimum or maximum) used to calculate the resulting feedback for single
zone applications or the control philosophy for multi-zone applications; programming of the
setpoint(s) and manual or auto-tuning of the PI(D) loop.
21-
Extended Closed Loop
Parameters used to configure the 3 extended closed loop PI(D) controllers which for example can
be used to control external actuators (e.g. chilled water valve to maintain supply air temperature in
a VAV system) including: engineering unit for the reference and feedback of each controller (e.g. C,
F etc); defining the range of the reference/setpoint for each controller; defining where each of the
references/setpoints and feedback signals come from (e.g. which analog input or the BMS HLI);
programming of the setpoint and manual or auto-tuning of the each of the PI(D) controllers.
95
7 7
7 7
Group
Title
22-
Application Functions
Function
Parameters used to monitor, protect and control pumps, fans and compressors including: no flow
detection and protection of pumps (including auto-setup of this function); dry pump protection;
end of curve detection and protection of pumps; sleep mode (especially useful for cooling tower
and booster pump sets); broken belt detection (typically used for fan applications to detect no air
flow instead of using a p switch installed across the fan); short cycle protection of compressors and
pump flow compensation of setpoint (especially useful for secondary chilled water pump applications where the p sensor has been installed close to the pump and not acoss the furthest most
significant load(s) in the system; using this function can compensate for the sensor installation and
help to realise the maximum energy savings).
23-
Time Based Functions
Time based parameters including: those used to initiate daily or weekly actions based on the built in
real time clock (e.g. change of setpoint for night set back mode or start/stop of the pump/fan/
compressor start/stop of a external equipment); preventative maintenance functions which can be
based on running or operating hour time intervals or on specific dates and times; energy log
(especially useful in retrofit applications or where information of the actual historical load (kW) on
the pump/fan/compressor is of interest); trending (especially useful in retrofit or other applications
where there is an interest to log operating power, current, frequency or speed of the pump/fan/
compressor for analysis and a payback counter.
24-
Application Functions 2
Parameters used to set-up Fire Mode and/or to control a bypass contactor/starter if designed into
25-
Cascade Controller
Parameters used to configure and monitor the built in pump cascade controller (typically used for
26-
Analog I/O Option MCB 109 Parameters used to configure the Analog I/O option (MCB 109) including: definition of the analog
the system.
pump booster sets).
input types (e.g. voltage, Pt1000 or Ni1000) and scaling and definition of the analog output
functions and scaling.
Table 7.1: Parameter Groups
Parameter descriptions and selections are displayed on the graphic (GLCP) or numeric (NLCP) display. (See relevant section for
details.) Access the parameters by pressing the [Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] button on the control panel. The Quick Menu is
used primarily for commissioning the unit at start-up by providing the parameters necessary to start operation. The Main Menu
provides access to all parameters for detailed application programming.
All digital input/output and analog input/output terminals are multifunctional. All terminals have factory default functions
suitable for the majority of HVAC applications but if other special functions are required, they must be programmed as
explained in parameter group 5 or 6.
96
7.3.2 0-** Operation and Display

Par. No. # Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion index
Type
0-0* Basic Settings

0-01
Language
[0] English
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
0-02
Motor Speed Unit
[1] Hz
2 set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
0-03
Regional Settings
[0] International
2 set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
0-04
Operating State at Power-up
[0] Resume
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0-05
Local Mode Unit
[0] As Motor Speed Unit
2 set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
0-1* Set-up Operations

0-10
Active Set-up
[1] Set-up 1
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
0-11
Programming Set-up
[9] Active Set-up
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0-12
This Set-up Linked to
[0] Not linked
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
0-13
Readout: Linked Set-ups
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
0-14
Readout: Prog. Set-ups / Channel
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Int32
7 7
0-2* LCP Display

0-20
Display Line 1.1 Small
1602
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
0-21
1614
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
0-22
1610
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
0-23
Display Line 2 Large
1613
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
0-24
Display Line 3 Large
1502
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
0-25
My Personal Menu
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint16
[1] %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int32
0-3* LCP Custom Readout

0-30
Custom Readout Unit
0-31
Custom Readout Min Value
100.00 CustomReadou0-32
Custom Readout Max Value
tUnit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int32
0-37
Display Text 1
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
VisStr[25]
0-38
Display Text 2
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
VisStr[25]
0-39
Display Text 3
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
VisStr[25]
0-4* LCP Keypad

0-40
[Hand on] Key on LCP
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0-41
[Off] Key on LCP
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0-42
[Auto on] Key on LCP
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0-43
[Reset] Key on LCP
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0-44
[Off/Reset] Key on LCP
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0-45
[Drive Bypass] Key on LCP
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0-5* Copy/Save
0-50
LCP Copy
[0] No copy
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
0-51
Set-up Copy
[0] No copy
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
100 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
Int16
[0] Full access
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
200 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
Int16
[0] Full access
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
0-6* Password
0-60
Main Menu Password
0-61
Access to Main Menu w/o Password
0-65
Personal Menu Password
0-66
Access to Personal Menu w/o

Password
0-7* Clock Settings

0-70
Date and Time
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
TimeOfDay
0-71
Date Format
null
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
0-72
Time Format
null
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
0-74
DST/Summertime
[0] Off
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
0-76
DST/Summertime Start
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
TimeOfDay
97
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion index
Type
0-77
DST/Summertime End
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
TimeOfDay
0-79
Clock Fault
null
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
0-81
Working Days
null
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
0-82
Additional Working Days
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
TimeOfDay
0-83
Additional Non-Working Days
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
TimeOfDay
0-89
Date and Time Readout
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
VisStr[25]
7 7
98
7.3.3 1-** Load / Motor

Par. No. Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change during
Conver-
operation
sion index
TRUE
Uint8
Type
1-0* General Settings

1-00
Configuration Mode
null
All set-ups
[3] Auto Energy Optim.

1-03
Torque Characteristics
1-06
Clockwise Direction
VT
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
[0] Normal
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
1-2* Motor Data

1-20
Motor Power [kW]
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
1-21
Motor Power [HP]
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Uint32
1-22
Motor Voltage
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
1-23
Motor Frequency
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
1-24
Motor Current
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Uint32
1-25
Motor Nominal Speed
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
67
Uint16
1-28
Motor Rotation Check
[0] Off
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
1-29
Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)
[0] Off
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
7 7
1-3* Adv. Motor Data

1-30
Stator Resistance (Rs)
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
-4
Uint32
1-31
Rotor Resistance (Rr)
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
-4
Uint32
1-35
Main Reactance (Xh)
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
-4
Uint32
1-36
Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Uint32
1-39
Motor Poles
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
1-5* Load Indep. Setting

1-50
Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed
1-51
Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
1-52
Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
1-58
Flystart Test Pulses Current
30 %
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
1-59
Flystart Test Pulses Frequency
200 %
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
1-6* Load Depen. Setting

1-60
Low Speed Load Compensation
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Int16
1-61
High Speed Load Compensation
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Int16
1-62
Slip Compensation
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
Int16
1-63
Slip Compensation Time Constant
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
1-64
Resonance Dampening
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
1-65
Resonance Dampening Time Constant
5 ms
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint8
Uint16
1-7* Start Adjustments

1-71
Start Delay
0.0 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
1-73
Flying Start
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
1-77
Compressor Start Max Speed [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
1-78
Compressor Start Max Speed [Hz]
1-79
Compressor Start Max Time to Trip
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
5.0 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint8
1-8* Stop Adjustments

1-80
Function at Stop
[0] Coast
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
1-81
Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
1-82
Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
1-86
Trip Speed Low [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
1-87
Trip Speed Low [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
1-9* Motor Temperature

1-90
Motor Thermal Protection
[4] ETR trip 1
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
1-91
Motor External Fan
[0] No
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
1-93
Thermistor Source
[0] None
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
99
7 7
7.3.4 2-** Brakes

Par. No. #
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change during
Conver-
operation
sion index
Type
2-0* DC-Brake
2-00
DC Hold/Preheat Current
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
2-01
DC Brake Current
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
2-02
DC Braking Time
10.0 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
2-03
DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
2-04
DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
2-1* Brake Energy Funct.

2-10
Brake Function
2-11
Brake Resistor (ohm)
2-12
Brake Power Limit (kW)
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
2-13
Brake Power Monitoring
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
2-15
Brake Check
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
2-16
AC brake Max. Current
100.0 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint32
2-17
Over-voltage Control
[2] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
Default value
4-set-up
Change during
operation
Conversion index
Type
Int32
7.3.5 3-** Reference / Ramps

3-0* Reference Limits
3-02
Minimum Reference
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
3-03
Maximum Reference
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
3-04
Reference Function
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
3-1* References
3-10
Preset Reference
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
3-11
Jog Speed [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
3-13
Reference Site
[0] Linked to Hand /

Auto
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
3-14
Preset Relative Reference
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int32
3-15
Reference 1 Source
[1] Analog input 53
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
3-16
Reference 2 Source
[20] Digital pot.meter
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
3-17
Reference 3 Source
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
3-19
Jog Speed [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
3-4* Ramp 1
3-41
Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
3-42
Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
3-5* Ramp 2
3-51
Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
3-52
Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
3-8* Other Ramps

3-80
Jog Ramp Time
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
3-81
Quick Stop Ramp Time
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
3-82
Starting Ramp Up Time
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
3-9* Digital Pot.Meter

3-90
Step Size
0.10 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
3-91
Ramp Time
1.00 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
3-92
Power Restore
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
3-93
Maximum Limit
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Int16
3-94
Minimum Limit
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
Int16
3-95
Ramp Delay
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
TimD
100
7.3.6 4-** Limits / Warnings

Default value
4-set-up
Change during
Conver-
operation
sion index
Type
4-1* Motor Limits

4-10
Motor Speed Direction
[2] Both directions
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
4-11
Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
4-12
Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
4-13
Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
4-14
Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
4-16
Torque Limit Motor Mode
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
4-17
Torque Limit Generator Mode
100.0 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
4-18
Current Limit
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint32
4-19
Max Output Frequency
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Uint16
4-5* Adj. Warnings

4-50
Warning Current Low
0.00 A
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
4-51
Warning Current High
ImaxVLT (P1637)
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
4-52
Warning Speed Low
0 RPM
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
4-53
Warning Speed High
outputSpeedHighLimit
(P413)
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
4-54
Warning Reference Low
-999999.999 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
4-55
Warning Reference High
999999.999 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
7 7
-999999.999 ProcessCtr4-56
Warning Feedback Low
lUnit
999999.999 ProcessCtrlU-
4-57
Warning Feedback High
4-58
Missing Motor Phase Function
nit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
[2] Trip 1000 ms
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
4-6* Speed Bypass

4-60
Bypass Speed From [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
4-61
Bypass Speed From [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
4-62
Bypass Speed To [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
4-63
Bypass Speed To [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
4-64
Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up
[0] Off
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
101
7 7
7.3.7 5-** Digital In / Out

Default value
4-set-up
Change during
Conver-
operation
sion index
Type
5-0* Digital I/O mode

5-00
Digital I/O Mode
[0] PNP - Active at 24V
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
5-01
Terminal 27 Mode
[0] Input
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-02
Terminal 29 Mode
[0] Input
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-1* Digital Inputs

5-10
[8] Start
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-11
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-12
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-13
[14] Jog
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-14
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-15
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-16
Terminal X30/2 Digital Input
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-17
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-18
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-3* Digital Outputs

5-30
Terminal 27 Digital Output
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-31
Terminal 29 Digital Output
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-32
Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-33
Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-4* Relays
5-40
Function Relay
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5-41
On Delay, Relay
0.01 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
5-42
Off Delay, Relay
0.01 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
5-5* Pulse Input

5-50
Term. 29 Low Frequency
100 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
5-51
Term. 29 High Frequency
100 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
5-52
Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
5-53
Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
100.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
5-54
Pulse Filter Time Constant #29
100 ms
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Uint16
5-55
Term. 33 Low Frequency
100 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
5-56
Term. 33 High Frequency
100 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
5-57
Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
5-58
Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value
100.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
5-59
Pulse Filter Time Constant #33
100 ms
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Uint16
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5000 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
Uint32
5-6* Pulse Output

5-60
Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable
5-62
Pulse Output Max Freq #27
5-63
Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable
5-65
Pulse Output Max Freq #29
5-66
Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable
5-68
Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6
5000 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
5000 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
Uint32
5-9* Bus Controlled

5-90
Digital & Relay Bus Control
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
5-93
Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
5-94
Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset
0.00 %
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16
5-95
Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
5-96
Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset
0.00 %
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16
5-97
Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
5-98
Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset
0.00 %
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16
102
7.3.8 6-** Analog In / Out

Default value
4-set-up
Change during
Conver-
operation
sion index
Type
6-0* Analog I/O Mode

6-00
Live Zero Timeout Time
10 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
6-01
Live Zero Timeout Function
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
6-02
Fire Mode Live Zero Timeout Function
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
6-1* Analog Input 53

6-10
Terminal 53 Low Voltage
0.07 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
6-11
Terminal 53 High Voltage
10.00 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
6-12
Terminal 53 Low Current
4.00 mA
All set-ups
TRUE
-5
Int16
6-13
Terminal 53 High Current
20.00 mA
All set-ups
TRUE
-5
Int16
6-14
Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
6-15
Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
6-16
Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
6-17
Terminal 53 Live Zero
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0.07 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
7 7
6-2* Analog Input 54

6-20
Terminal 54 Low Voltage
6-21
Terminal 54 High Voltage
10.00 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
6-22
Terminal 54 Low Current
4.00 mA
All set-ups
TRUE
-5
Int16
6-23
Terminal 54 High Current
20.00 mA
All set-ups
TRUE
-5
Int16
6-24
Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
6-25
Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
100.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
6-26
Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
6-27
Terminal 54 Live Zero
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
6-3* Analog Input X30/11

6-30
Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage
0.07 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
6-31
Terminal X30/11 High Voltage
10.00 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
6-34
Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
6-35
Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value
100.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
6-36
Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
6-37
Term. X30/11 Live Zero
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8

6-40
0.07 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
6-41
10.00 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
6-44
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
6-45
Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value
100.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
6-46
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
6-47
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
6-5* Analog Output 42

6-50
Terminal 42 Output
6-51
Terminal 42 Output Min Scale
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
6-52
Terminal 42 Output Max Scale
100.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
6-53
Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
6-54
Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset
0.00 %
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16
6-6* Analog Output X30/8

6-60
Terminal X30/8 Output
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
6-61
Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
6-62
Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale
100.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
6-63
Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
0.00 %
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16
Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout

6-64
Preset
103
7 7
7.3.9 8-** Communication and Options

Default value
4-set-up
Change during
Conver-
operation
sion index
Type
8-0* General Settings

8-01
Control Site
null
All set-ups
TRUE
8-02
Control Source
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
Uint8
8-03
Control Timeout Time
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
-1
Uint32
8-04
Control Timeout Function
[0] Off
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
8-05
End-of-Timeout Function
[1] Resume set-up
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
8-06
Reset Control Timeout
[0] Do not reset
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
8-07
Diagnosis Trigger
[0] Disable
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
8-1* Control Settings

8-10
Control Profile
8-13
Configurable Status Word STW
[0] FC profile
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
[1] Profile Default
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
8-3* FC Port Settings

8-30
Protocol
null
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
8-31
Address
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
8-32
Baud Rate
null
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
8-33
Parity / Stop Bits
null
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
8-34
Estimated cycle time
0 ms
2 set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint32
8-35
Minimum Response Delay
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
-3
Uint16
8-36
Maximum Response Delay
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
-3
Uint16
8-37
Maximum Inter-Char Delay
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
-5
Uint16
8-4* FC MC protocol set

8-40
Telegram Selection
[1] Standard telegram 1
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
8-42
PCD write configuration
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
8-43
PCD read configuration
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50
Coasting Select
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
8-52
DC Brake Select
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
8-53
Start Select
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
8-54
Reversing Select
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
8-55
Set-up Select
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
8-56
Preset Reference Select
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
Uint32
8-7* BACnet
8-70
BACnet Device Instance
8-72
MS/TP Max Masters
8-73
MS/TP Max Info Frames
8-74
"I-Am" Service
8-75
Initialisation Password
1 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
127 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
1 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint16
[0] Send at power-up
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
VisStr[20]
8-8* FC Port Diagnostics

8-80
Bus Message Count
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
8-81
Bus Error Count
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
8-82
Slave Messages Rcvd
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
8-83
Slave Error Count
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
8-84
Slave Messages Sent
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
8-85
Slave Timeout Errors
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
8-89
Diagnostics Count
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
Int32
8-9* Bus Jog / Feedback

8-90
Bus Jog 1 Speed
100 RPM
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
8-91
Bus Jog 2 Speed
200 RPM
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
8-94
Bus Feedback 1
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
N2
8-95
Bus Feedback 2
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
N2
8-96
Bus Feedback 3
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
N2
104
7.3.10 9-** Profibus

Default value
4-set-up
Change during
Conver-
operation
sion index
Type
9-00
Setpoint
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
9-07
Actual Value
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
9-15
PCD Write Configuration
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
9-16
PCD Read Configuration
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
9-18
Node Address
Uint8
9-22
Telegram Selection
9-23
Parameters for Signals
9-27
9-28
9-44
9-45
126 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
[108] PPO 8
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
Parameter Edit
[1] Enabled
2 set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
Process Control
[1] Enable cyclic master
2 set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
Fault Message Counter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
Fault Code
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
9-47
Fault Number
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
9-52
Fault Situation Counter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
9-53
Profibus Warning Word
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
V2
9-63
Actual Baud Rate
[255] No baudrate found
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
9-64
Device Identification
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
9-65
Profile Number
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
OctStr[2]
9-67
Control Word 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
V2
9-68
Status Word 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
V2
9-71
Profibus Save Data Values
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
9-72
ProfibusDriveReset
[0] No action
1 set-up
FALSE
Uint8
9-80
Defined Parameters (1)
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
9-81
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
9-82
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
9-83
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
9-84
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
9-90
Changed Parameters (1)
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
9-91
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
9-92
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
9-93
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
9-94
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
7 7
105
7 7
7.3.11 10-** CAN Fieldbus

Default value
4-set-up
Change
Conver-
during
sion index
Type
operation
10-0* Common Settings
10-00
CAN Protocol
null
2 set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
10-01
Baud Rate Select
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
10-02
MAC ID
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
10-05
Readout Transmit Error Counter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
10-06
Readout Receive Error Counter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
10-07
Readout Bus Off Counter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
10-1* DeviceNet
10-10
Process Data Type Selection
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
10-11
Process Data Config Write
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
10-12
Process Data Config Read
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
10-13
Warning Parameter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
10-14
Net Reference
[0] Off
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
10-15
Net Control
[0] Off
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
10-2* COS Filters

10-20
COS Filter 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
10-21
COS Filter 2
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
10-22
COS Filter 3
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
10-23
COS Filter 4
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
Uint8
10-3* Parameter Access

10-30
Array Index
0 N/A
2 set-ups
TRUE
10-31
Store Data Values
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
10-32
Devicenet Revision
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
10-33
Store Always
[0] Off
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
10-34
DeviceNet Product Code
120 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint16
10-39
Devicenet F Parameters
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
Default value
4-set-up
Change
Conver-
Type
during
sion index
7.3.12 11-** LonWorks

operation
11-0* LonWorks ID
11-00
Neuron ID
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
OctStr[6]
[0] VSD profile
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
11-1* LON Functions

11-10
Drive Profile
11-15
LON Warning Word
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
11-17
XIF Revision
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
VisStr[5]
11-18
LonWorks Revision
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
VisStr[5]
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
11-2* LON Param. Access

11-21
106
Store Data Values
7.3.13 13-** Smart Logic Controller

Par. No. #
Default value
4-set-up
Change
Conver-
during
sion index
Type
operation
13-0* SLC Settings
13-00
SL Controller Mode
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
13-01
Start Event
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
13-02
Stop Event
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
13-03
Reset SLC
[0] Do not reset SLC
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
13-1* Comparators
13-10
Comparator Operand
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
13-11
Comparator Operator
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
13-12
Comparator Value
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
SL Controller Timer
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
-3
TimD
13-2* Timers
13-20
13-4* Logic Rules

13-40
Logic Rule Boolean 1
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
13-41
Logic Rule Operator 1
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
13-42
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
13-43
Logic Rule Operator 2
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
13-44
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
13-51
SL Controller Event
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
13-52
SL Controller Action
null
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
7 7
13-5* States
107
7 7
7.3.14 14-** Special Functions

Par. No. #
Default value
4-set-up
Change
Conver-
during
sion index
Type
operation
14-0* Inverter Switching
14-00
Switching Pattern
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
14-01
Switching Frequency
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
14-03
Overmodulation
[1] On
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
14-04
PWM Random
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
14-1* Mains On/Off

14-10
Mains Failure
[0] No function
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
14-11
Mains Voltage at Mains Fault
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
14-12
Function at Mains Imbalance
[0] Trip
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
14-2* Reset Functions

14-20
Reset Mode
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
14-21
Automatic Restart Time
10 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
14-22
Operation Mode
[0] Normal operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
14-23
Typecode Setting
null
2 set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
14-25
Trip Delay at Torque Limit
60 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
14-26
Trip Delay at Inverter Fault
14-28
Production Settings
14-29
Service Code
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
[0] No action
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Int32
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.

Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional
14-30
Gain
100 %
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
14-31
Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time
0.020 s
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Uint16
14-32
Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time
26.0 ms
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Uint16
66 %
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
10 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
14-4* Energy Optimising

14-40
VT Level
14-41
AEO Minimum Magnetisation
14-42
Minimum AEO Frequency
14-43
Motor Cosphi
14-5* Environment
14-50
RFI Filter
[1] On
1 set-up
FALSE
Uint8
14-51
DC Link Compensation
[1] On
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
14-52
Fan Control
[0] Auto
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
14-53
Fan Monitor
[1] Warning
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
14-55
Output Filter
[0] No Filter
1 set-up
FALSE
Uint8
14-59
Actual Number of Inverter Units
SR
1 set-up
FALSE
Uint8
Uint8
14-6* Auto Derate

14-60
Function at Over Temperature
[0] Trip
All set-ups
TRUE
14-61
Function at Inverter Overload
[0] Trip
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
14-62
Inv. Overload Derate Current
95 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
108
7.3.15 15-** Drive Information

#
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion index
Type
15-0* Operating Data

15-00
Operating Hours
0h
All set-ups
FALSE
74
Uint32
15-01
Running Hours
0h
All set-ups
FALSE
74
Uint32
15-02
kWh Counter
0 kWh
All set-ups
FALSE
75
Uint32
15-03
Power Up's
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
15-04
Over Temp's
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
15-05
Over Volt's
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
15-06
Reset kWh Counter
[0] Do not reset
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
15-07
Reset Running Hours Counter
[0] Do not reset
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
15-08
Number of Starts
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
Uint16
15-1* Data Log Settings

15-10
Logging Source
2 set-ups
TRUE
15-11
Logging Interval
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
-3
TimD
15-12
Trigger Event
[0] False
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
15-13
Logging Mode
[0] Log always
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
15-14
Samples Before Trigger
50 N/A
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
7 7
15-2* Historic Log

15-20
Historic Log: Event
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
15-21
Historic Log: Value
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
15-22
Historic Log: Time
0 ms
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Uint32
15-23
Historic Log: Date and Time
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
TimeOfDay
Uint8
15-3* Alarm Log

15-30
Alarm Log: Error Code
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
15-31
Alarm Log: Value
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Int16
15-32
Alarm Log: Time
0s
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
15-33
Alarm Log: Date and Time
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
TimeOfDay
15-4* Drive Identification

15-40
FC Type
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[6]
15-41
Power Section
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[20]
15-42
Voltage
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[20]
15-43
Software Version
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[5]
15-44
Ordered Typecode String
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[40]
15-45
Actual Typecode String
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[40]
VisStr[8]
Frequency Converter Ordering

15-46
No
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
15-47
Power Card Ordering No
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[8]
15-48
LCP Id No
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[20]
15-49
SW ID Control Card
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[20]
15-50
SW ID Power Card
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[20]
Frequency Converter Serial

15-51
Number
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[10]
15-53
Power Card Serial Number
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[19]
15-55
Vendor URL
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[40]
15-56
Vendor Name
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[40]
15-6* Option Ident

15-60
Option Mounted
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[30]
15-61
Option SW Version
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[20]
15-62
Option Ordering No
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[8]
15-63
Option Serial No
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[18]
109

#
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion index
Type
15-70
Option in Slot A
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[30]
15-71
Slot A Option SW Version
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[20]
15-72
Option in Slot B
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[30]
15-73
Slot B Option SW Version
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[20]
15-74
Option in Slot C0
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[30]
15-75
Slot C0 Option SW Version
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[20]
15-76
Option in Slot C1
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[30]
15-77
Slot C1 Option SW Version
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[20]
Uint16
15-9* Parameter Info

15-92
Defined Parameters
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
15-93
Modified Parameters
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
15-98
Drive Identification
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
VisStr[40]
15-99
Parameter Metadata
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
7 7
110
7.3.16 16-** Data Readouts

#
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion index
Type
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
V2
backUnit
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
0.0 %
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Int16
16-0* General Status

16-00
Control Word
0.000 ReferenceFeed16-01
Reference [Unit]
16-02
Reference [%]
16-03
Status Word
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
V2
16-05
Main Actual Value [%]
0.00 %
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
N2
16-09
Custom Readout
0.00 CustomReadoutUnit
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Int32
Int32
16-1* Motor Status

16-10
Power [kW]
0.00 kW
All set-ups
FALSE
16-11
Power [hp]
0.00 hp
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Int32
16-12
Motor Voltage
0.0 V
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Uint16
16-13
Frequency
0.0 Hz
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Uint16
16-14
Motor Current
0.00 A
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Int32
16-15
Frequency [%]
0.00 %
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
N2
16-16
Torque [Nm]
0.0 Nm
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Int32
16-17
Speed [RPM]
0 RPM
All set-ups
FALSE
67
Int32
16-18
Motor Thermal
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
16-22
Torque [%]
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
Int16
16-26
Power Filtered [kW]
0.000 kW
All set-ups
FALSE
Int32
16-27
Power Filtered [hp]
0.000 hp
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
7 7
16-3* Drive Status

16-30
DC Link Voltage
0V
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
16-32
Brake Energy /s
0.000 kW
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
16-33
Brake Energy /2 min
0.000 kW
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
16-34
Heatsink Temp.
0 C
All set-ups
FALSE
100
Uint8
16-35
Inverter Thermal
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
16-36
Inv. Nom. Current
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Uint32
16-37
Inv. Max. Current
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Uint32
16-38
SL Controller State
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
16-39
Control Card Temp.
0 C
All set-ups
FALSE
100
Uint8
16-40
Logging Buffer Full
[0] No
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
16-43
Timed Actions Status
[0] Timed Actions Auto
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
16-49
Current Fault Source
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.

16-50
External Reference
16-52
Feedback [Unit]
0.0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Int16
0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
16-53
Int32
Digi Pot Reference
0.00 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Int16
16-54
Feedback 1 [Unit]
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
16-55
Feedback 2 [Unit]
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
16-56
Feedback 3 [Unit]
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
16-58
PID Output [%]
0.0 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Int16
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint16
Uint8
16-6* Inputs & Outputs

16-60
Digital Input
16-61
Terminal 53 Switch Setting
[0] Current
All set-ups
FALSE
16-62
Analog Input 53
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
16-63
Terminal 54 Switch Setting
[0] Current
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
16-64
Analog Input 54
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
16-65
Analog Output 42 [mA]
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int16
111
7 7

#
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion index
Type
16-66
Digital Output [bin]
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Int16
16-67
Pulse Input #29 [Hz]
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Int32
16-68
Pulse Input #33 [Hz]
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Int32
16-69
Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Int32
16-70
Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Int32
16-71
Relay Output [bin]
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Int16
16-72
Counter A
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Int32
16-73
Counter B
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Int32
16-75
Analog In X30/11
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
16-76
Analog In X30/12
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
16-77
Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int16
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port

16-80
Fieldbus CTW 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
V2
16-82
Fieldbus REF 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
N2
16-84
Comm. Option STW
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
V2
16-85
FC Port CTW 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
V2
16-86
FC Port REF 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
N2
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts

16-90
Alarm Word
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
16-91
Alarm Word 2
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
16-92
Warning Word
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
16-93
Warning Word 2
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
16-94
Ext. Status Word
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
16-95
Ext. Status Word 2
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
16-96
Maintenance Word
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
112
7.3.17 18-** Info & Readouts

Default value
4-set-up
Change
Conver-
during
sion index
Type
operation
18-0* Maintenance Log
18-00
Maintenance Log: Item
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
18-01
Maintenance Log: Action
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
Uint8
18-02
Maintenance Log: Time
0s
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
18-03
Maintenance Log: Date and Time
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
TimeOfDay
18-1* Fire Mode Log

18-10
Fire Mode Log: Event
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
18-11
Fire Mode Log: Time
0s
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint32
18-12
Fire Mode Log: Date and Time
SR
All set-ups
FALSE
TimeOfDay
18-3* Inputs & Outputs

18-30
Analog Input X42/1
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
18-31
Analog Input X42/3
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
18-32
Analog Input X42/5
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
18-33
Analog Out X42/7 [V]
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int16
18-34
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int16
18-35
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int16
0.000 SensorlessUnit
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
7 7
18-5* Ref. & Feedb.

18-50
Sensorless Readout [unit]
113
7 7
7.3.18 20-** FC Closed Loop

Default value
4-set-up
Change during
Conver-
operation
sion index
Type
20-0* Feedback
20-00
Feedback 1 Source
[2] Analog input 54
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
20-01
Feedback 1 Conversion
[0] Linear
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
20-02
Feedback 1 Source Unit
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
20-03
Feedback 2 Source
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
20-04
[0] Linear
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
20-05
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
20-06
Feedback 3 Source
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
20-07
[0] Linear
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
20-08
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
20-12
Reference/Feedback Unit
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
20-13
Minimum Reference/Feedb.
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
20-14
Maximum Reference/Feedb.
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
[3] Minimum
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
20-2* Feedback/Setpoint
20-20
Feedback Function
20-21
Setpoint 1
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
20-22
Setpoint 2
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
20-23
Setpoint 3
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
20-3* Feedb. Adv. Conv.

20-30
Refrigerant
[0] R22
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
20-31
User Defined Refrigerant A1
10.0000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Uint32
20-32
-2250.00 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int32
20-33
250.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint32
20-34
Duct 1 Area [m2]
0.500 m2
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint32
20-35
Duct 1 Area [in2]
750 in2
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
20-36
Duct 2 Area [m2]
0.500 m2
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint32
20-37
Duct 2 Area [in2]
750 in2
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
20-38
Air Density Factor [%]
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
20-6* Sensorless
20-60
Sensorless Unit
20-69
Sensorless Information
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
VisStr[25]
Uint8
20-7* PID Autotuning

20-70
Closed Loop Type
[0] Auto
2 set-ups
TRUE
20-71
PID Performance
[0] Normal
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
20-72
PID Output Change
0.10 N/A
2 set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
20-73
Minimum Feedback Level
lUnit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
20-74
Maximum Feedback Level
2 set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
20-79
PID Autotuning
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
[0] Normal
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
-999999.000 ProcessCtr-
20-8* PID Basic Settings

20-81
PID Normal/ Inverse Control
20-82
PID Start Speed [RPM]
20-83
PID Start Speed [Hz]
20-84
On Reference Bandwidth
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
5%
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
20-9* PID Controller

20-91
PID Anti Windup
20-93
PID Proportional Gain
20-94
20-95
20-96
PID Diff. Gain Limit
114
[1] On
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0.50 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
PID Integral Time
20.00 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
PID Differentiation Time
0.00 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
5.0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
7.3.19 21-** Ext. Closed Loop

Par. No.
#
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion index
Type
Uint8
21-0* Ext. CL Autotuning

21-00
Closed Loop Type
[0] Auto
2 set-ups
TRUE
21-01
PID Performance
[0] Normal
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
21-02
PID Output Change
0.10 N/A
2 set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
21-03
Minimum Feedback Level
-999999.000 N/A
2 set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-04
Maximum Feedback Level
999999.000 N/A
2 set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-09
PID Autotuning
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
[1] %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
Int32
21-1* Ext. CL 1 Ref./Fb.

21-10
Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit
21-11
Ext. 1 Minimum Reference
0.000 ExtPID1Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
21-12
Ext. 1 Maximum Reference
100.000 ExtPID1Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-13
Ext. 1 Reference Source
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
21-14
Ext. 1 Feedback Source
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
21-15
Ext. 1 Setpoint
0.000 ExtPID1Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-17
Ext. 1 Reference [Unit]
0.000 ExtPID1Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-18
Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit]
0.000 ExtPID1Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-19
Ext. 1 Output [%]
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
Int32
[0] Normal
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0.01 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
10000.00 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
7 7
21-2* Ext. CL 1 PID

21-20
Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control
21-21
Ext. 1 Proportional Gain
21-22
Ext. 1 Integral Time
21-23
Ext. 1 Differentation Time
21-24
Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit
0.00 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
5.0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16

21-30
[1] %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
21-31
0.000 ExtPID2Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-32
100.000 ExtPID2Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-33
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
21-34
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
21-35
Ext. 2 Setpoint
0.000 ExtPID2Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-37
0.000 ExtPID2Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-38
0.000 ExtPID2Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-39
Ext. 2 Output [%]
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
Int32
[0] Normal
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0.01 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
10000.00 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
0.00 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
5.0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
21-4* Ext. CL 2 PID

21-40
21-41
21-42
21-43
21-44

21-50
[1] %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
21-51
0.000 ExtPID3Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-52
100.000 ExtPID3Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-53
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
21-54
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
21-55
Ext. 3 Setpoint
0.000 ExtPID3Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-57
0.000 ExtPID3Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-58
0.000 ExtPID3Unit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
21-59
Ext. 3 Output [%]
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
Int32
115
Par. No.
#
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion index
Type
[0] Normal
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
21-6* Ext. CL 3 PID

21-60
21-61
21-62
21-63
21-64
0.01 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
10000.00 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
0.00 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
5.0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
7 7
116
7.3.20 22-** Application Functions

#
Default value
4-set-up
Change during
operation
Conversion index
Type
22-0* Miscellaneous
22-00
External Interlock Delay
22-01
Power Filter Time
0s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
0.50 s
2 set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
22-2* No-Flow Detection

22-20
Low Power Auto Set-up
[0] Off
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
22-21
Low Power Detection
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
22-22
Low Speed Detection
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
22-23
No-Flow Function
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
22-24
No-Flow Delay
10 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
22-26
Dry Pump Function
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
22-27
Dry Pump Delay
10 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
0.00 kW
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
22-3* No-Flow Power Tuning

22-30
No-Flow Power
22-31
Power Correction Factor
22-32
Low Speed [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
22-33
Low Speed [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
22-34
Low Speed Power [kW]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
22-35
Low Speed Power [HP]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
22-36
High Speed [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
22-37
High Speed [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
22-38
High Speed Power [kW]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
22-39
High Speed Power [HP]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
22-4* Sleep Mode

22-40
Minimum Run Time
10 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
22-41
Minimum Sleep Time
10 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
22-42
Wake-up Speed [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
22-43
Wake-up Speed [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
22-44
Wake-up Ref./FB Difference
10 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Int8
22-45
Setpoint Boost
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
Int8
22-46
Maximum Boost Time
60 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
10 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
Uint8
22-5* End of Curve

22-50
End of Curve Function
22-51
End of Curve Delay
22-6* Broken Belt Detection

22-60
Broken Belt Function
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
22-61
Broken Belt Torque
10 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
22-62
Broken Belt Delay
10 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
ime (P2277)
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
0s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
22-7* Short Cycle Protection

22-75
Short Cycle Protection
start_to_start_min_on_t
22-76
Interval between Starts
22-77
Minimum Run Time
22-78
Minimum Run Time Override
22-79
Minimum Run Time Override Value
22-8* Flow Compensation

22-80
Flow Compensation
22-81
Square-linear Curve Approximation
22-82
Work Point Calculation
22-83
Speed at No-Flow [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
22-84
Speed at No-Flow [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
117
7 7

#
Default value
4-set-up
Change during
operation
Conversion index
Type
22-85
Speed at Design Point [RPM]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
22-86
Speed at Design Point [Hz]
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
22-87
Pressure at No-Flow Speed
22-88
Pressure at Rated Speed
22-89
22-90
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
999999.999 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
Flow at Design Point
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
Flow at Rated Speed
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
7 7
118
7.3.21 23-** Time Based Funtions

Default value
4-set-up
Change during
Conver-
operation
sion index
Type
23-0* Timed Actions

23-00
ON Time
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
23-01
ON Action
[0] Disabled
2 set-ups
TRUE
TimeOfDayWoDate
Uint8
23-02
OFF Time
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
TimeOfDayWoDate
23-03
OFF Action
[1] No action
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
23-04
Occurrence
[0] All days
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
[0] Timed Actions Auto
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
[1] Enabled
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
23-0* Timed Actions Settings

23-08
Timed Actions Mode
23-09
Timed Actions Reactivation
23-1* Maintenance
23-10
Maintenance Item
[1] Motor bearings
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
23-11
Maintenance Action
[1] Lubricate
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
23-12
Maintenance Time Base
[0] Disabled
1 set-up
TRUE
Uint8
23-13
Maintenance Time Interval
1h
1 set-up
TRUE
74
Uint32
23-14
Maintenance Date and Time
SR
1 set-up
TRUE
TimeOfDay
[0] Do not reset
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
VisStr[20]
[5] Last 24 Hours
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
TimeOfDay
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
[0] Do not reset
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
7 7
23-1* Maintenance Reset

23-15
Reset Maintenance Word
23-16
Maintenance Text
23-5* Energy Log

23-50
Energy Log Resolution
23-51
Period Start
23-53
Energy Log
23-54
Reset Energy Log
23-6* Trending
23-60
Trend Variable
[0] Power [kW]
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
23-61
Continuous Bin Data
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
23-62
Timed Bin Data
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
23-63
Timed Period Start
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
TimeOfDay
23-64
Timed Period Stop
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
TimeOfDay
23-65
Minimum Bin Value
SR
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
23-66
Reset Continuous Bin Data
[0] Do not reset
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
23-67
Reset Timed Bin Data
[0] Do not reset
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
100 %
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
1.00 N/A
2 set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
23-8* Payback Counter

23-80
Power Reference Factor
23-81
Energy Cost
23-82
Investment
0 N/A
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint32
23-83
Energy Savings
0 kWh
All set-ups
TRUE
75
Int32
23-84
Cost Savings
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Int32
119
7 7
7.3.22 24-** Application Functions 2

Default value
4-set-up
Change during
Conver-
operation
sion index
Type
24-0* Fire Mode

24-00
Fire Mode Function
24-01
Fire Mode Configuration
[0] Disabled
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
[0] Open Loop
All set-ups
TRUE
24-02
Uint8
Fire Mode Unit
null
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
24-03
Fire Mode Min Reference
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
24-04
Fire Mode Max Reference
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
24-05
Fire Mode Preset Reference
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
24-06
Fire Mode Reference Source
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
24-07
Fire Mode Feedback Source
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
24-09
Fire Mode Alarm Handling
[1] Trip, Critical Alarms
2 set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
[0] Disabled
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
0s
2 set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
24-1* Drive Bypass

24-10
Drive Bypass Function
24-11
Drive Bypass Delay Time
24-9* Multi-Motor Funct.

24-90
Missing Motor Function
24-91
Missing Motor Coefficient 1
0.0000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Int32
24-92
0.0000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Int32
24-93
0.0000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Int32
24-94
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
24-95
Locked Rotor Function
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
24-96
Locked Rotor Coefficient 1
0.0000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Int32
24-97
0.0000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Int32
24-98
0.0000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Int32
24-99
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
120
7.3.23 25-** Cascade Pack Controller

Default value
4-set-up
Change during
Conver-
operation
sion index
Type
25-0* System Settings

25-00
Cascade Controller
25-02
Motor Start
[0] Disabled
2 set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
[0] Direct on Line
2 set-ups
FALSE
25-04
Pump Cycling
Uint8
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-05
25-06
Fixed Lead Pump
[1] Yes
2 set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
Number of Pumps
2 N/A
2 set-ups
FALSE
Uint8
25-2* Bandwidth Settings

25-20
Staging Bandwidth
10 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-21
Override Bandwidth
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-22
Fixed Speed Bandwidth
h (P2520)
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-23
SBW Staging Delay
15 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
25-24
SBW Destaging Delay
15 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
25-25
OBW Time
10 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
25-26
Destage At No-Flow
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-27
Stage Function
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-28
Stage Function Time
Uint16
25-29
Destage Function
25-30
Destage Function Time
casco_staging_bandwidt
15 s
All set-ups
TRUE
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
15 s
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint16
7 7
25-4* Staging Settings

25-40
Ramp Down Delay
10.0 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
25-41
Ramp Up Delay
2.0 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
25-42
Staging Threshold
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-43
Destaging Threshold
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-44
Staging Speed [RPM]
0 RPM
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
25-45
Staging Speed [Hz]
0.0 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
25-46
Destaging Speed [RPM]
0 RPM
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
25-47
Destaging Speed [Hz]
0.0 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
Uint8
25-5* Alternation Settings

25-50
25-51
Alternation Event
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
[0] External
All set-ups
TRUE
25-52
Uint8
Alternation Time Interval
24 h
All set-ups
TRUE
74
Uint16
25-53
Alternation Timer Value
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
VisStr[7]
25-54
Alternation Predefined Time
SR
All set-ups
TRUE
Date
25-55
Alternate if Load < 50%
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-56
Staging Mode at Alternation
[0] Slow
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-58
Run Next Pump Delay
0.1 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
25-59
Run on Mains Delay
0.5 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
TimeOfDayWo-
25-8* Status
25-80
Cascade Status
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
VisStr[25]
25-81
Pump Status
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
VisStr[25]
25-82
Lead Pump
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-83
Relay Status
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
VisStr[4]
25-84
Pump ON Time
0h
All set-ups
TRUE
74
Uint32
25-85
Relay ON Time
25-86
Reset Relay Counters
0h
All set-ups
TRUE
74
Uint32
[0] Do not reset
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-9* Service
25-90
Pump Interlock
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
25-91
Manual Alternation
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
121
7 7
7.3.24 26-** Analog I / O Option MCB 109

Default value
4-set-up
Change during
Conver-
operation
sion index
Type
26-0* Analog I/O Mode

26-00
Terminal X42/1 Mode
[1] Voltage
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
26-01
Terminal X42/3 Mode
[1] Voltage
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
26-02
Terminal X42/5 Mode
[1] Voltage
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8

26-10
0.07 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
26-11
10.00 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
26-14
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
100.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
Term. X42/1 High Ref./Feedb.

26-15
Value
26-16
26-17
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8

26-20
0.07 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
26-21
10.00 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
26-24
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
26-25

Value
100.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
26-26
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
26-27
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8

26-30
0.07 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
26-31
10.00 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
26-34
0.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
100.000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8

26-35
Value
26-36
26-37
26-4* Analog Out X42/7

26-40
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
26-41
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
26-42
100.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
26-43
Terminal X42/7 Bus Control
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
26-44
Terminal X42/7 Timeout Preset
0.00 %
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16

26-50
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
26-51
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
26-52
100.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
26-53
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
26-54
0.00 %
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16

26-60
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
Uint8
26-61
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
26-62
100.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
26-63
0.00 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
26-64
0.00 %
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16
122
Troubleshooting
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Alarms and Warnings
A warning or an alarm is signalled by the relevant LED on the
front of the frequency converter and indicated by a code on
the display.
A warning remains active until its cause is no longer present.
Under certain circumstances operation of the motor may still
be continued. Warning messages may be critical, but are not
necessarily so.
In the event of an alarm, the frequency converter will have
tripped. Alarms must be reset to restart operation once their
cause has been rectified.
This may be done in four ways:
1.
By using the [RESET] control button on the LCP.
2.
Via a digital input with the Reset function.
3.
Via serial communication/optional fieldbus.
4.
By resetting automatically using the [Auto Reset]

function, which is a default setting for VLT HVAC
Drive Drive, see par. 14-20 Reset Mode in the FC 100
Programming Guide
Alarms that are trip-locked offer additional protection,

means that the mains supply must be switched off
before the alarm can be reset. After being switched back
on, the frequency converter is no longer blocked and
may be reset as described above once the cause has
been rectified.
Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using
the automatic reset function in par. 14-20 Reset Mode
(Warning: automatic wake-up is possible!)
If a warning and alarm is marked against a code in the
table on the following page, this means that either a
warning occurs before an alarm, or it can be specified
whether it is a warning or an alarm that is to be
displayed for a given fault.
This is possible, for instance, in par. 1-90 Motor Thermal
Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries on
coasting, and the alarm and warning flash on the
frequency converter. Once the problem has been
rectified, only the alarm continues flashing.
NOTE
After a manual reset using the [RESET] button on the
LCP, the [AUTO ON] or [HAND ON] button must be
pressed to restart the motor.
If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its cause
has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked (see also
table on following page).
123
8 8
8 8
Troubleshooting
No.
Description
Warning
10 Volts low
Live zero error
(X)
No motor
(X)
Mains phase loss
(X)
DC link voltage high
DC link voltage low
DC over voltage
DC under voltage
Inverter overloaded
10
Motor ETR over temperature
(X)
(X)
1-90
11
Motor thermistor over temperature
(X)
(X)
1-90
12
Torque limit
13
Over Current
14
Earth fault
15
Hardware mismatch
16
Short Circuit
17
Control word timeout
(X)
23
Internal Fan Fault
Alarm/
Trip
Alarm/Trip Lock
(X)
Parameter Reference
6-01
1-80
(X)
(X)
(X)
24
External Fan Fault
25
Brake resistor short-circuited
26
Brake resistor power limit
(X)
(X)
27
Brake chopper short-circuited
28
Brake check
(X)
(X)
29
Drive over temperature
14-12
8-04
14-53
2-13
2-15
X
30
Motor phase U missing
(X)
(X)
(X)
4-58
31
Motor phase V missing
(X)
(X)
(X)
4-58
(X)
(X)
(X)
4-58
32
Motor phase W missing
33
Inrush fault
34
Fieldbus communication fault
35
Out of frequency range
36
Mains failure
37
Phase Imbalance
38
Internal fault
39
Heatsink sensor
40
Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27
(X)
5-00, 5-01
41
Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29
(X)
5-00, 5-02
42
Overload of Digital Output On X30/6
(X)
5-32
42
Overload of Digital Output On X30/7
(X)
46
Pwr. card supply
47
24 V supply low
48
1.8 V supply low
X
X
5-33
X
49
Speed limit
50
AMA calibration failed
(X)
X
X
51
AMA check Unom and Inom
52
AMA low Inom
53
AMA motor too big
54
AMA motor too small
55
AMA Parameter out of range
56
AMA interrupted by user
57
AMA timeout
58
AMA internal fault
59
Current limit
124
1-86
Troubleshooting
No.
Description
Warning
60
External Interlock
62
Output Frequency at Maximum Limit
X
X
64
Voltage Limit
65
Control Board Over-temperature
66
Heat sink Temperature Low
Alarm/
Trip
Alarm/Trip Lock
67
Option Configuration has Changed
69
Pwr. Card Temp
70
Illegal FC configuration
71
PTC 1 Safe Stop
72
Dangerous Failure
73
Safe Stop Auto Restart
Parameter Reference
X
X
X1)
X1)
76
Power Unit Setup
79
Illegal PS config
X
X
80
Drive Initialized to Default Value
91
Analog input 54 wrong settings
92
NoFlow
X
22-2*
93
Dry Pump
22-2*
94
End of Curve
22-5*
95
Broken Belt
22-6*
96
Start Delayed
22-7*
97
Stop Delayed
22-7*
98
Clock Fault
0-7*
201
Fire M was Active
202
Fire M Limits Exceeded
203
Missing Motor
204
Locked Rotor
243
Brake IGBT
244
Heatsink temp
245
Heatsink sensor
246
Pwr.card supply
247
Pwr.card temp
248
Illegal PS config
250
New spare parts
251
New Type Code
8 8
X
X
Table 8.1: Alarm/Warning code list
(X) Dependent on parameter

1) Can not be Auto reset via par. 14-20 Reset Mode
A trip is the action when an alarm has appeared. The trip will
coast the motor and can be reset by pressing the reset button
or make a reset by a digital input (parameter group 5-1* [1]).
The original event that caused an alarm cannot damage the
frequency converter or cause dangerous conditions. A trip
lock is an action when an alarm occurs, which may cause
damage to frequency converter or connected parts. A Trip
Lock situation can only be reset by a power cycling.
LED indication
Warning
yellow
Alarm
flashing red
Trip locked
yellow and red
Table 8.2: LED Indication
125
8 8
Troubleshooting
Alarm Word and Extended Status Word

Bit
Hex
00000001
00000002
00000004
3
4
Dec
Alarm Word
Warning Word
Extended Status Word
Brake Check
Brake Check
Ramping
Pwr. Card Temp
Pwr. Card Temp
AMA Running
Earth Fault
Earth Fault
Start CW/CCW
00000008
Ctrl.Card Temp
Ctrl.Card Temp
Slow Down
00000010
16
Ctrl. Word TO
Ctrl. Word TO
Catch Up
00000020
32
Over Current
Over Current
Feedback High
00000040
64
Torque Limit
Torque Limit
Feedback Low
00000080
128
Motor Th Over
Motor Th Over
Output Current High
00000100
256
Motor ETR Over
Motor ETR Over
Output Current Low
00000200
512
Inverter Overld.
Inverter Overld.
Output Freq High
10
00000400
1024
DC under Volt
DC under Volt
Output Freq Low
11
00000800
2048
DC over Volt
DC over Volt
Brake Check OK
12
00001000
4096
Short Circuit
DC Voltage Low
Braking Max
13
00002000
8192
Inrush Fault
DC Voltage High
Braking
14
00004000
16384
Mains ph. Loss
Mains ph. Loss
Out of Speed Range
15
00008000
32768
AMA Not OK
No Motor
OVC Active
16
00010000
65536
Live Zero Error
Live Zero Error
17
00020000
131072
Internal Fault
10V Low
18
00040000
262144
Brake Overload
Brake Overload
19
00080000
524288
U phase Loss
Brake Resistor
20
00100000
1048576
V phase Loss
Brake IGBT
21
00200000
2097152
W phase Loss
Speed Limit
22
00400000
4194304
Fieldbus Fault
Fieldbus Fault
23
00800000
8388608
24 V Supply Low
24V Supply Low
24
01000000
16777216
Mains Failure
Mains Failure
25
02000000
33554432
1.8V Supply Low
Current Limit
26
04000000
67108864
Brake Resistor
Low Temp
27
08000000
134217728
Brake IGBT
Voltage Limit
28
10000000
268435456
Option Change
Unused
29
20000000
536870912
Drive Initialized
Unused
30
40000000
1073741824
Safe Stop
Unused
Table 8.3: Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word and Extended Status Word
The alarm words, warning words and extended status words

can be read out via serial bus or optional fieldbus for diagnosis. See also par. 16-90 Alarm Word, par. 16-92 Warning Word
and par. 16-94 Ext. Status Word.
126
Troubleshooting
8.1.1 Fault Messages

WARNING 1, 10 volts low
The control card voltage is below 10 V from terminal 50.
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 V supply
is overloaded. Max. 15 mA or minimum 590 .
This condition can be caused by a short in a connected
potentiometer or improper wiring of the potentiometer.
WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage
If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit, the
frequency converter trips after a time.
Troubleshooting:
Connect a brake resistor
Extend the ramp time
Change the ramp type
Activate functions in par. 2-10 Brake Function
Increase par. 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault
Troubleshooting: Remove the wiring from terminal 50. If the

warning clears, the problem is with the customer wiring. If the
warning does not clear, replace the control card.
WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error
This warning or alarm will only appear if programmed by the
user in par. 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function. The signal on one
of the analog inputs is less than 50% of the minimum value
programmed for that input. This condition can be caused by
broken wiring or faulty device sending the signal.
Troubleshooting:
Check connections on all the analog input terminals.
Control card terminals 53 and 54 for signals, terminal
55 common. MCB 101 terminals 11 and 12 for
signals, terminal 10 common. MCB 109 terminals 1,
3, 5 for signals, terminals 2, 4, 6 common).
Check that the drive programming and switch
settings match the analog signal type.
Perform Input Terminal Signal Test.
WARNING/ALARM 3, No motor
No motor has been connected to the output of the frequency
converter. This warning or alarm will only appear if programmed by the user in par. 1-80 Function at Stop.
WARNING/ALARM 8, DC under voltage

If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC) drops below the under
voltage limit, the frequency converter checks if a 24 V backup
supply is connected. If no 24 V backup supply is connected,
the frequency converter trips after a fixed time delay. The time
delay varies with unit size.
Troubleshooting:
Check that the supply voltage matches the frequency converter voltage.
8 8
Perform Input voltage test

Perform soft charge and rectifier circuit test
WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overloaded
The frequency converter is about to cut out because of an
overload (too high current for too long). The counter for
electronic, thermal inverter protection gives a warning at 98%
and trips at 100%, while giving an alarm. The frequency
converter cannot be reset until the counter is below 90%.
The fault is that the frequency converter is overloaded by
more than 100% for too long.
Troubleshooting:
Come the output current shown on the LCP keypad
with the drive rated current.
Troubleshooting: Check the connection between the drive

and the motor.
Come the output current shown on the LCP keypad

with measured motor current.
WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss A phase is missing on

the supply side, or the mains voltage imbalance is too high.
This message also appears for a fault in the input rectifier on
the frequency converter. Options are programmed at
par. 14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance.
Display the Thermal Drive Load on the keypad and

monitor the value. When running above the drive
continuous current rating, the counter should
increase. When running below the drive continuous
current rating, the counter should decrease.
Troubleshooting: Check the supply voltage and supply

currents to the frequency converter.
NOTE: See the derating section in the Design Guide for more
details if a high switching frequency is required.
WARNING 5, DC link voltage high

The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than the high
voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the drive
voltage rating. The frequency converter is still active.
WARNING 6, DC link voltage low
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is lower than the low
voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the drive
voltage rating. The frequency converter is still active.
127
8 8
Troubleshooting
WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload temperature

According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), the
motor is too hot. Select whether the frequency converter gives
a warning or an alarm when the counter reaches 100% in
par. 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. The fault is that the motor
is overloaded by more than 100% for too long.
Troubleshooting:
This fault may be caused by shock loading or fast
acceleration with high inertia loads.
Turn off the frequency converter. Check if the motor
shaft can be turned.
Check that the motor size matches the frequency
converter.
Troubleshooting:
Check if motor is over heating.
If the motor is mechanically overloaded
That the motor par. 1-24 Motor Current is set correctly.
Motor data in parameters 1-20 through 1-25 are set
correctly.
Incorrect motor data in parameters 1-20 through

1-25.
ALARM 14, Earth (ground) fault
There is a discharge from the output phases to earth, either in
the cable between the frequency converter and the motor or
in the motor itself.
The setting in par. 1-91 Motor External Fan.

Run AMA in par. 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
(AMA).
WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor over temp
The thermistor or the thermistor connection is disconnected.
Select whether the frequency converter gives a warning or an
alarm when the counter reaches 100% in par. 1-90 Motor
Thermal Protection.
Troubleshooting:
Turn off the frequency converter and remove the
earth fault.
Measure the resistance to ground of the motor leads
and the motor with a megohmmeter to check for
earth faults in the motor.
Perform current sensor test.
ALARM 15, Hardware mismatch
A fitted option is not operational with the present control
board hardware or software.
Troubleshooting:
Check if motor is over heating.
Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.
Check that the thermistor is connected correctly
between terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input)
and terminal 50 (+10 V supply), or between terminal
18 or 19 (digital input PNP only) and terminal 50.
If a KTY sensor is used, check for correct connection
between terminal 54 and 55.
If using a thermal switch or thermistor, check the
programming of par. 1-93 Thermistor Source matches
sensor wiring.
If using a KTY sensor, check the programming of
parameters 1-95, 1-96, and 1-97 match sensor wiring.
Record the value of the following parameters and contact your

Danfoss supplier:
Par. 15-40 FC Type
Par. 15-41 Power Section
Par. 15-42 Voltage
Par. 15-43 Software Version
Par. 15-45 Actual Typecode String
Par. 15-49 SW ID Control Card
Par. 15-50 SW ID Power Card
Par. 15-60 Option Mounted
Par. 15-61 Option SW Version
WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit

The torque is higher than the value in par. 4-16 Torque Limit
Motor Mode or the torque is higher than the value in
par. 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode. Par. 14-25 Trip Delay at
Torque Limit can be used to change this from a warning only
condition to a warning followed by an alarm.
WARNING/ALARM 13, Over current
The inverter peak current limit (approx. 200% of the rated
current) is exceeded. The warning lasts about 1.5 sec., then the
frequency converter trips and issues an alarm. If extended
mechanical brake control is selected, trip can be reset
externally.
128
ALARM 16, Short circuit

There is short-circuiting in the motor or on the motor
terminals.
Turn off the frequency converter and remove the short-circuit.
WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout
There is no communication to the frequency converter.
The warning will only be active when par. 8-04 Control Timeout
Function is NOT set to OFF.
If par. 8-04 Control Timeout Function is set to Stop and Trip, a
warning appears and the frequency converter ramps down
until it trips, while giving an alarm.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting:
Check connections on the serial communication
cable.
This alarm/ warning could also occur should the brake resistor
overheat. Terminal 104 to 106 are available as brake resistor.
Klixon inputs, see section Brake Resistor Temperature Switch.
Increase par. 8-03 Control Timeout Time
WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed

Brake resistor fault: the brake resistor is not connected or not
working.
Check par. 2-15 Brake Check.
Check operation of the communication equipment.

Verify proper installation based on EMC requirements.
WARNING 23, Internal fan fault
The fan warning function is an extra protection function that
checks if the fan is running / mounted. The fan warning can be
disabled in par. 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
For the D, E, and F Frame drives, the regulated voltage to the
fans is monitored.
ALARM 29, Heatsink temp

The maximum temperature of the heatsink has been
exceeded. The temperature fault will not be reset until the
temperature falls below a defined heatsink temperature. The
trip and reset point are different based on the drive power
size.
Troubleshooting:
Ambient temperature too high.
Too long motor cable.
Troubleshooting:
Check fan resistance.
Incorrect clearance above and below the drive.
Check soft charge fuses.
Dirty heatsink.
8 8
Blocked air flow around the drive.

WARNING 24, External fan fault
The fan warning function is an extra protection function that
checks if the fan is running / mounted. The fan warning can be
disabled in par. 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
For the D, E, and F Frame drives, the regulated voltage to the
fans is monitored.
Troubleshooting:
Damaged heatsink fan.

For the D, E, and F Frame Drives, this alarm is based on the
temperature measured by the heatsink sensor mounted inside
the IGBT modules. For the F Frame drives, this alarm can also
be caused by the thermal sensor in the Rectifier module.
Troubleshooting:

WARNING 25, Brake resistor short circuit
The brake resistor is monitored during operation. If it short
circuits, the brake function is disconnected and the warning
appears. The frequency converter still works, but without the
brake function. Turn off the frequency converter and replace
the brake resistor (see par. 2-15 Brake Check).
WARNING/ALARM 26, Brake resistor power limit
The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated: as a
percentage, as a mean value over the last 120 seconds, on the
basis of the resistance value of the brake resistor, and the
intermediate circuit voltage. The warning is active when the
dissipated braking power is higher than 90%. If Trip [2] has
been selected in par. 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring, the
frequency converter cuts out and issues this alarm, when the
dissipated braking power is higher than 100%.
WARNING/ALARM 27, Brake chopper fault
The brake transistor is monitored during operation and if it
short-circuits, the brake function disconnects and issues a
warning. The frequency converter is still able to run, but since
the brake transistor has short-circuited, substantial power is
transmitted to the brake resistor, even if it is inactive.
Turn off the frequency converter and remove the brake
resistor.

IGBT thermal sensor.
ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing
Motor phase U between the frequency converter and the
motor is missing.
Turn off the frequency converter and check motor phase U.
ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing
Motor phase V between the frequency converter and the
motor is missing.
Turn off the frequency converter and check motor phase V.
ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing
Motor phase W between the frequency converter and the
motor is missing.
Turn off the frequency converter and check motor phase W.
ALARM 33, Inrush fault
Too many power-ups have occurred within a short time
period. Let unit cool to operating temperature.
129
Troubleshooting
WARNING/ALARM 34, Fieldbus communication fault

The fieldbus on the communication option card is not
working.
2304
Could not read any data from power EEPROM
2305
Missing SW version from power unit
2314
Missing power unit data from power unit
WARNING/ALARM 35, Out of frequency range:

This warning is active if the output frequency has reached the
high limit (set in par. 4-53) or low limit (set in par. 4-52). In
Process Control, Closed Loop (par. 1-00) this warning is
displayed.
2315
Missing SW version from power unit
2316
Missing io_statepage from power unit
WARNING/ALARM 36, Mains failure

This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to the
frequency converter is lost and par. 14-10 Mains Failure is NOT
set to OFF. Check the fuses to the frequency converter
ALARM 38, Internal fault
It may be necessary to contact your Danfoss supplier. Some
typical alarm messages:
2330
Power size information between the power cards does
2561
No communication from DSP to ATACD
2562
No communication from ATACD to DSP (state running)
not match
2816
Stack overflow Control board module
2817
Scheduler slow tasks
2818
Fast tasks
2819
Parameter thread
2820
LCP Stack overflow
2821
Serial port overflow
Power EEPROM data is defect or too old
2822
USB port overflow
512
Control board EEPROM data is defect or too old
2836
cfListMempool to small
513
Communication time out reading EEPROM data
514
Communication time out reading EEPROM data
515
Application Orientated Control cannot recognize the
256-258
3072-5122 Parameter value is outside its limits

5123
Option in slot B: Hardware incompatible with Control

board hardware
Cannot write to the EEPROM because a write command

is on progress
Option in slot A: Hardware incompatible with Control

board hardware
5124
EEPROM data
516
5125
Option in slot C0: Hardware incompatible with Control
5126
Option in slot C1: Hardware incompatible with Control
board hardware
517
Write command is under time out
518
Failure in the EEPROM
519
Missing or invalid Barcode data in EEPROM
board hardware
Parameter value outside of min/max limits
5376-6231 Out of memory
783
1024-
A can-telegram that has to be sent, couldn't be sent
1279
1281
Digital Signal Processor flash timeout
1282
Power micro software version mismatch
1283
Power EEPROM data version mismatch
1284
Cannot read Digital Signal Processor software version
1299
Option SW in slot A is too old
1300
Option SW in slot B is too old
1302
Option SW in slot C1 is too old
1315
Option SW in slot A is not supported (not allowed)
1316
Option SW in slot B is not supported (not allowed)
1318
Option SW in slot C1 is not supported (not allowed)
1379
Option A did not respond when calculating Platform

Version.
1380
Option B did not respond when calculating Platform

Version.
1536
An exception in the Application Orientated Control is

registered. Debug information written in LCP
1792
DSP watchdog is active. Debugging of power part data

Motor Orientated Control data not transferred correctly
2049
Power data restarted
2064-2072 H081x: option in slot x has restarted

2080-2088 H082x: option in slot x has issued a powerup-wait
2096-2104 H083x: option in slot x has issued a legal powerup-wait
130
Power card configuration is determined to be incorrect

at power up
Serial port cannot be initialized. Serious hardware failure
8 8
2324
ALARM 39, Heatsink sensor

No feedback from the heatsink temperature sensor.
The signal from the IGBT thermal sensor is not available on the
power card. The problem could be on the power card, on the
gate drive card, or the ribbon cable between the power card
and gate drive card.
WARNING 40, Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27
Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove shortcircuit connection. Check par. 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and
par. 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode.
WARNING 41, Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove shortcircuit connection. Check par. 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and
par. 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
WARNING 42, Overload of Digital Output on X30/6 or Overload
of Digital Output on X30/7
For X30/6, check the load connected to X30/6 or remove
short-circuit connection. Check par. 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out
(MCB 101).
For X30/7, check the load connected to X30/7 or remove
short-circuit connection. Check par. 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out
(MCB 101).
Troubleshooting
ALARM 46, Power card supply

The supply on the power card is out of range.
There are three power supplies generated by the switch mode
power supply (SMPS) on the power card: 24 V, 5V, +/- 18V.
When powered with 24 VDC with the MCB 107 option, only
the 24 V and 5 V supplies are monitored. When powered with
three phase mains voltage, all three supplied are monitored.
WARNING 47, 24 V supply low
The 24 V DC is measured on the control card. The external V
DC backup power supply may be overloaded, otherwise
contact your Danfoss supplier.
WARNING 48, 1.8 V supply low
The 1.8 V DC supply used on the control card is outside of
allowable limits. The power supply is measured on the control
card.
WARNING 49, Speed limit
When the speed is not within the specified range in par. 4-11
and par. 4-13. the drive will show a warning. When the speed
is below the specified limit in par. 1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]
(except when starting or stopping) the drive will trip.
ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed
Contact your Danfoss supplier.
ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom
The setting of motor voltage, motor current, and motor power
is presumably wrong. Check the settings.
ALARM 52, AMA low Inom
The motor current is too low. Check the settings.
ALARM 53, AMA motor too big
The motor is too big for the AMA to be carried out.
ALARM 54, AMA motor too small
The motor is too big for the AMA to be carried out.
ALARM 55, AMA Parameter out of range
The parameter values found from the motor are outside
acceptable range.
ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user
The AMA has been interrupted by the user.
ALARM 57, AMA timeout
Try to start the AMA again a number of times, until the AMA is
carried out. Please note that repeated runs may heat the
motor to a level where the resistance Rs and Rr are increased.
In most cases, however, this is not critical.
WARNING 62, Output frequency at maximum limit

The output frequency is higher than the value set in
par. 4-19 Max Output Frequency
WARNING 64, Voltage limit
The load and speed combination demands a motor voltage
higher than the actual DC link voltage.
WARNING/ALARM/TRIP 65, Control card over temperature
Control card over temperature: The cutout temperature of the
control card is 80 C.
WARNING 66, Heatsink temperature low
This warning is based on the temperature sensor in the IGBT
module.
Troubleshooting:
The heatsink temperature measured as 0 C could indicate
that the temperature sensor is defective causing the fan speed
to increase to the maximum. If the sensor wire between the
IGBT and the gate drive card is disconnected, this warning
would result. Also, check the IGBT thermal sensor.
ALARM 67, Option module configuration has changed
One or more options have either been added or removed
since the last power-down.
ALARM 68, Safe stop activated
Safe stop has been activated. To resume normal operation,
apply 24 V DC to terminal 37, then send a reset signal (via Bus,
Digital I/O, or by pressing the reset key. See par. .
ALARM 69, Power card temperature
The temperature sensor on the power card is either too hot or
too cold.
Troubleshooting:
Check the operation of the door fans.
Check that the filters for the door fans are not
blocked.
Check that the gland plate is properly installed on IP
21 and IP 54 (NEMA 1 and NEMA 12) drives.
ALARM 70, Illegal FC Configuration
Actual combination of control board and power board is
illegal.
ALARM 72, Dangerous failure
Safe stop with trip lock. Unexpected signal levels on safe stop
and digital input from the MCB 112 PTC thermistor card.
WARNING 73, Safe stop auto restart
Safe stopped. Note that with automatic restart enabled, the
motor may start when the fault is cleared.
ALARM 58, AMA internal fault

Contact your Danfoss supplier.
WARNING 59, Current limit
The current is higher than the value in par. 4-18 Current
Limit.
WARNING 60, External interlock
External interlock has been activated. To resume normal
operation, apply 24 V DC to the terminal programmed for
external interlock and reset the frequency converter (via serial
communication, digital I/O, or by pressing reset button on
keypad).
WARNING 76, Power Unit Setup

The required number of power units does not match the
detected number of active power units.
Troubleshooting:
When replacing an F-frame module, this will occur if the
power specific data in the module power card does not match
the rest of the drive. Please confirm the spare part and its
power card are the correct part number.
131
8 8
8 8
Troubleshooting
WARNING 77, Reduced power mode:

This warning indicates that the drive is operating in reduced
power mode (i.e. less than the allowed number of inverter
sections). This warning will be generated on power cycle when
the drive is set to run with fewer inverters and will remain on.
1 = left most inverter module.
ALARM 79, Illegal power section configuration

The scaling card is the incorrect part number or not installed.
Also MK102 connector on the power card could not be installed.
5 = rectifier module.
ALARM 80, Drive initialized to default value

Parameter settings are initialized to default settings after a
manual reset.
ALARM 91, Analog input 54 wrong settings
Switch S202 has to be set in position OFF (voltage input) when
a KTY sensor is connected to analog input terminal 54.
ALARM 92, No flow
A no-load situation has been detected in the system. See
parameter group 22-2.
ALARM 93, Dry pump
A no-flow situation and high speed indicates that the pump
has run dry. See parameter group 22-2.
ALARM 94, End of curve
Feedback stays lower than the set point which may indicate
leakage in the pipe system. See parameter group 22-5.
ALARM 95, Broken belt
Torque is below the torque level set for no load, indicating a
broken belt. See parameter group 22-6.
ALARM 96, Start delayed
Motor start has been delayed due to short-cycle protection
active. See parameter group 22-7.
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 drive.

2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 drive.
ALARM 244, Heatsink temperature

This alarm is only for F Frame drives. It is equivalent to Alarm
29. The report value in the alarm log indicates which power
module generated the alarm:
ALARM 245, Heatsink sensor
ALARM 246, Power card supply
WARNING 97, Stop delayed

Stopping the motor has been delayed due to short cycle
protection is active. See parameter group 22-7.
WARNING 98, Clock fault

Clock Fault. Time is not set or RTC clock (if mounted) has
failed. See parameter group 0-7.
WARNING 201, Fire Mode was Active

Fire Mode has been active.
WARNING 202, Fire Mode Limits Exceeded
Fire Mode has suppressed one or more warranty voiding
alarms.
WARNING 203, Missing Motor
A multi-motor under-load situation was detected, this could
be due to e.g. a missing motor.
WARNING 204, Locked Rotor
A multi-motor overload situation was detected, this could be
due to e.g. a locked rotor.

ALARM 247, Power card temperature
ALARM 243, Brake IGBT

132
Troubleshooting
ALARM 248, Illegal power section configuration

ALARM 250, New spare part
The power or switch mode power supply has been exchanged.
The frequency converter type code must be restored in the
EEPROM. Select the correct type code in par. 14-23 Typecode
Setting according to the label on the unit. Remember to select
Save to EEPROM to complete.
ALARM 251, New type code
The frequency converter has a new type code.
8 8
8.2 Acoustic Noise or Vibration

If the motor or the equipment driven by the motor - e.g. a fan
blade - is making noise or vibrations at certain frequencies, try
the following:
Speed Bypass, parameter group 4-6*
Switching pattern and -frequency parameter group

14-0*
Resonance Dampening, par. 1-64 Resonance

Dampening
Over-modulation, par. 14-03 Overmodulation set to

off
133
Specifications
9 Specifications
9.1 General Specifications
Mains supply 200 - 240 VAC - Normal overload 110% for 1 minute
Frequency converter
Typical Shaft Output [kW]
P1K1
P1K5
P2K2
P3K0
P3K7
1.1
1.5
2.2
3.7
A2
A2
A2
A3
A3
A5
IP 20 / Chassis
(A2+A3 may be converted to IP21 using a conversion kit. (Please
see also items Mechanical mounting in Operating Instructions and
IP 21/Type 1 Enclosure kit in the Design Guide.))
IP 55 / NEMA 12
A4/A5
A4/A5
A4/A5
A5
IP 66 / NEMA 12
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
Typical Shaft Output [HP] at 208 V
1.5
2.0
2.9
4.0
4.9
6.6
7.5
10.6
12.5
16.7
7.3
8.3
11.7
13.8
18.4
2.38
2.70
3.82
4.50
6.00
Output current
Continuous
(3 x 200-240 V ) [A]
Intermittent
(3 x 200-240 V ) [A]
Continuous
kVA (208 V AC) [kVA]
Max. cable size:
9 9
(mains, motor, brake)

[mm2 /AWG]
4/10
2)
Max. input current

Continuous
(3 x 200-240 V ) [A]
Intermittent
(3 x 200-240 V ) [A]
Max. pre-fuses1) [A]
5.9
6.8
9.5
11.3
15.0
6.5
7.5
10.5
12.4
16.5
20
20
20
32
32
63
82
116
155
185
Environment
Estimated power loss
at rated max. load [W]
4)
Weight enclosure IP20 [kg]
4.9
4.9
4.9
6.6
6.6
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
9.7/13.5
9.7/13.5
9.7/13.5
13.5
13.5
Weight enclosure IP 66 [kg]
9.7/13.5
9.7/13.5
9.7/13.5
13.5
13.5
0.96
0.96
0.96
0.96
0.96
Efficiency
3)
Table 9.1: Mains Supply 200 - 240 VAC
134
135
4)
[mm2 /AWG]
2)
Max. cable size:
kVA (208 V AC) [kVA]
Continuous
(3 x 200-240 V ) [A]
Intermittent
8.7
26.6
0.96
23
3)

Efficiency
12
23
23

269
63
Environment:
24.2
22.0
16/6
24.2
Intermittent
(3 x 200-240 V ) [A]
(3 x 200-240 V ) [A]
Continuous
(3 x 200-240 V ) [A]
Continuous
Table 9.2: Mains Supply 3 x 200 - 240 VAC
Output current
7.5
5.5
P5K5
B1
IP 66 / NEMA 12
B1
Frequency converter
B1
IP 55 / NEMA 12
B3
Guide.))
IP 21 / NEMA 1
Mechanical mounting in Operating Instructions and IP 21/Type 1 Enclosure kit in the Design
IP 20 / Chassis
(B3+4 and C3+4 may be converted to IP21 using a conversion kit. (Please see also items
Mains supply 3 x 200 - 240 VAC - Normal overload 110% for 1 minute
63
447
12
23
23
63
310
12
23
23
10/7
16.6
46.2
30.8
11.1
42.0
28.0
50.8
46.2
30.8
33.9
27
15
10
23
11
7.5
0.96
27
27
P11K
P7K5
23
23.5
B1
B1
0.96
602
B1
B1
35/2
21.4
65.3
0.96
80
59.4
54.0
35/2
59.4
20
15
P15K
B2
B2
B2
B1
B1
B4
B3
B3
26.9
82.3
0.96
45
45
45
23.5
737
125
74.8
68.0
74.8
25
18.5
P18K
C1
C1
C1
B4
(B4=35/2)
50/1/0
31.7
96.8
0.97
45
45
45
35
845
125
88.0
80.0
35/2
88.0
30
22
P22K
C1
C1
C1
C3
41.4
127
0.97
45
45
45
35
1140
160
114.0
104.0
115
40
30
P30K
C1
C1
C1
C3
95/4/0
51.5
157
0.97
65
65
65
50
1353
200
143.0
130.0
70/3/0
143
50
37
P37K
C2
C2
C2
C4
MCM
120/250
61.2
187
0.97
65
65
65
50
1636
250
169.0
154.0
kcmil350
185/
170
60
45
P45K
C2
C2
C2
C4
Specifications
9 9
136
2.7
Continuous kVA (460 V AC) [kVA]
2)
Efficiency
3)
0.96
9.7/13.5
9.7/13.5
4.8
58
10
3.0
2.7
Environment
Max. pre-fuses1)[A]
(3 x 441-480 V) [A]
Intermittent
(3 x 441-480 V) [A]
Continuous
(3 x 380-440 V ) [A]
Intermittent
(3 x 380-440 V ) [A]
Continuous
[[mm2/ AWG]
4)
3.0
2.1
2.4
Intermittent (3 x 441-480 V) [A]
Max. cable size:
2.7
3.0
Continuous (3 x 441-480 V) [A]
3
3.3
2.7
2.8
3.7
3.4
4.5
4.1
A4/A5
A4/A5
A2
2.0
P1K5
1.5
0.97
9.7/13.5
9.7/13.5
4.9
62
10
3.4
3.1
4.1
3.7
9 9
Max. input current
Output current
A4/A5
A4/A5
IP 55 / NEMA 12
IP 66 / NEMA 12
ical mounting in Operating Instructions and IP 21/Type 1 Enclosure kit in the Design Guide.))
(A2+A3 may be converted to IP21 using a conversion kit. (Please see also items MechanA2
1.5
IP 20 / Chassis
P1K1
1.1
Frequency converter
Mains Supply 3 x 380 - 480 VAC - Normal overload 110% for 1 minute
0.97
9.7/13.5
9.7/13.5
4.9
88
20
4.7
4.3
5.5
5.0
3.8
3.9
5.3
4.8
6.2
5.6
A4/A5
A4/A5
A2
2.9
P2K2
2.2
0.97
9.7/13.5
9.7/13.5
4.9
116
20
6.3
5.7
7.2
6.5
4/10
5.0
5.0
6.9
6.3
7.9
7.2
A4/A5
A4/A5
A2
4.0
P3K0
3
0.97
9.7/13.5
9.7/13.5
4.9
124
20
8.1
7.4
9.9
9.0
6.5
6.9
9.0
8.2
11
10
A4/A5
A4/A5
A2
5.0
P4K0
4
0.97
14.2
14.2
6.6
187
32
10.9
9.9
12.9
11.7
8.8
9.0
12.1
11
14.3
13
A5
A5
A3
7.5
P5K5
5.5
0.97
14.2
14.2
6.6
255
32
14.3
13.0
15.8
14.4
11.6
11.0
15.4
14.5
17.6
16
A5
A5
A3
10
P7K5
7.5
Specifications
2)
0.98
23
3)
Efficiency
12
23
23

278

4)
63
Max. pre-fuses1)[A]
Environment
10/7
0.98
23
23
23
12
392
63
27.5
25
19
20.9
Continuous (3 x 380-439 V ) [A]

Intermittent (3 x 380-439 V ) [A]
With mains disconnect switch included:
AWG]
(mains, motor, brake) [mm2/
22.2
21.5
29
31.9
16.6
16.7
Continuous kVA 460 V AC) [kVA]
29.7
27
35.2
32
B1
B1
B1
B3
20
P15K
15
22
24.2
23.1
Max. input current
21
Max. cable size:
24
26.4
B1
IP 66 / NEMA 12
B1
Output current
B1
IP 21 / NEMA 1
B3
15
P11K
11
IP 55 / NEMA 12
(Please contact Danfoss)
(B3+4 and C3+4 may be converted to IP21 using a conversion kit
IP 20 / Chassis
Frequency converter
Mains Supply 3 x 380 - 480 VAC - Normal overload 110% for 1 minute
0.98
23
23
23
12
465
63
34.1
31
34
37.4
16/6
27.1
26
37.4
34
41.3
37.5
B1
B1
B1
B3
25
P18K
18.5
35/2
45
45
45
80
698
23.5
27
27
27
0.98
63
525
23.5
27
27
27
0.98
0.98
23.5
739
100
64.9
47
51.7
36
39.6
59
35/2
51.8
50.6
66
72.6
42.3
41.4
30.5
31.9
71.5
65
80.3
C1
C1
B4
55
60.5
61.6
44
40
44
52
40
73
61
B2
B2
67.1
B2
B2
44
B2
B2
48.4
C1
B4
B4
50
40
30
P37K
37
P30K
30
P22K
22
0.98
45
45
45
35
843
125
80.3
73
82
90.2
95
0.98
45
45
45
35
1083
160
105
0.98
65
65
65
50
1384
250
130
118
133
146
70/3/0
4/0
35/2
95/
104
102
143
130
162
147
C2
C2
C2
C4
100
P75K
75
50/1/0
96
106
83.7
73.4
116
105
117
106
C1
C1
C1
C3
75
P55K
55
(B4=35/2)
63.7
62.4
88
80
99
90
C1
C1
C1
C3
60
P45K
45
0.99
65
65
65
50
1474
250
160
145
161
177
kcmil350
185/
MCM250
120/
128
123
176
160
195
177
C2
C2
C2
C4
125
P90K
90
Specifications
9 9
137
138
A5
IP 66 / NEMA 12
Table 9.5:
5)
4.9
5.0
5.4
4.9
5.7
A5
A5
A2
6.1
6.1
6.7
6.1
7.0
6.4
A5
A5
A3
A3
P4K0
9.0
9.0
9.9
9.0
10.5
9.5
A5
A5
A3
A3
5.5
P5K5
11.0
11.0
12.1
11.0
12.7
11.5
A5
A5
A3
A3
7.5
P7K5
17.9
18.1
20
18
21
19
B1
B1
B1
B3
11
P11K
21.9
21.9
24
22
25
23
B1
B1
B1
B3
15
P15K
26.9
26.7
30
27
31
28
B1
B1
B1
B3
18.5
P18K
33.9
34.3
37
34
40
36
B2
B2
B2
B4
22
P22K
40.8
41
45
41
47
43
B2
B2
B2
B4
30
P30K
51.8
51.4
57
52
59
54
C1
C1
C1
B4
37
P37K
61.7
61.9
68
62
72
65
C1
C1
C1
C3
45
82.7
82.9
91
83
96
87
C1
C1
C1
C3
55
P55K
50/
P45K
99.6
100
110
100
116
105
C2
C2
C2
C4
75
P75K
130.5
130.5
144
131
151
137
C2
C2
C2
C4
90
P90K
2)
2)
With brake and load sharing 95/ 4/0
switch included:
With mains disconnect
[mm2]/[AWG]
Max. cable size, IP 20
[mm2]/[AWG]
10
4/10
16/
10
4/
10/
4/
16/6
35/
25/
35/2
1/0
50/
1/0
5)
185/
50
MCM2
150/
70/3/0 kcmil3
50
4/0
95/
4/0
95/
MCM2
50
3.9
3.9
4.3
3.9
4.5
5.2
A5
A5
A3
A2
3.7
P3K
120/
2.7
2.8
3.0
2.7
3.2
4.1
A5
A5
A3
A3
P3K0
IP 21/55/66
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.4
2.9
2.9
A5
A5
A3
2.2
P2K2
Max. cable size,
(575 V AC) [kVA]
Continuous kVA
(525 V AC) [kVA]
Continuous kVA
(3 x 525-600 V ) [A]
Intermittent
(3 x 525-600 V ) [A]
Continuous
(3 x 525-550 V ) [A]
Intermittent
(3 x 525-550 V ) [A]
2.6
A5
Continuous
A3
A3
IP 21 / NEMA 1
IP 55 / NEMA 12
Output current
A3
A3
1.5
1.1
IP 20 / Chassis
P1K5
P1K1
9 9
Size:
Mains supply 3 x 525 - 600 VACNormal overload 110% for 1 minute
Specifications
Table 9.6:
5)
4)
4)
0.97
13.5
6.5
50
10
2.7
2.4
P1K1
With brake and load sharing 95/ 4/0
Efficiency
IP21/55 [kg]
Weight enclosure
IP20 [kg]
Weight enclosure
Environment:
(3 x 525-600 V ) [A]
Intermittent
(3 x 525-600 V ) [A]
Continuous
Max. input current
Size:
0.97
13.5
6.5
65
10
3.0
2.7
P1K5
0.97
13.5
6.5
92
20
4.5
4.1
P2K2
0.97
13.5
6.5
122
20
5.7
5.2
P3K0
13.5
P3K
Mains supply 3 x 525 - 600 VACNormal overload 110% for 1 minute - continued
0.97
13.5
6.5
145
20
6.4
5.8
P4K0
0.97
14.2
6.6
195
32
9.5
8.6
P5K5
0.97
14.2
6.6
261
32
11.5
10.4
P7K5
P15K
20.9
23
63
400
12
23
0.98
P11K
17.2
19
63
300
12
23
0.98
0.98
23
12
475
63
28
25.4
P18K
0.98
27
23.5
525
63
36
32.7
P22K
0.98
27
23.5
700
80
43
39
P30K
0.98
27
23.5
750
100
54
49
P37K
0.98
45
35
850
125
65
59
P45K
0.98
45
35
1100
160
87
78.9
P55K
0.98
65
50
1400
250
105
95.3
P75K
0.98
65
50
1500
250
137
124.3
P90K
Specifications
9 9
139
9 9
Specifications
Mains supply (L1, L2, L3):

Supply voltage
200-240 V 10%, 380-480 V 10%, 525-690 V 10%
Mains voltage low / mains drop-out:

During low mains voltage or a mains drop-out, the FC continues until the intermediate circuit voltage drops below the minimum stop
level, which corresponds typically to 15% below the FC's lowest rated supply voltage. Power-up and full torque cannot be expected at
mains voltage lower than 10% below the FC's lowest rated supply voltage.
Supply frequency
Max. imbalance temporary between mains phases
True Power Factor ()
Displacement Power Factor (cos) near unity
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) enclosure type A
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) enclosure type B, C
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) enclosure type D, E, F
Environment according to EN60664-1
50/60 Hz 5%
3.0 % of rated supply voltage
0.9 nominal at rated load
(> 0.98)
maximum twice/min.
maximum once/min.
maximum once/2 min.
overvoltage category III / pollution degree 2
The unit is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100.000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 480/600 V maximum.
Motor output (U, V, W):
Output voltage
Output frequency
Switching on output
Ramp times
*
0 - 100% of supply voltage

0 - 1000 Hz*
Unlimited
1 - 3600 sec.
Dependent on power size.
Torque characteristics:
Starting torque (Constant torque)
Starting torque
Overload torque (Constant torque)
maximum 110% for 1 min.*

maximum 135% up to 0.5 sec.*
maximum 110% for 1 min.*
*Percentage relates to the frequency converter's nominal torque.

Cable lengths and cross sections:
Max. motor cable length, screened/armoured
Max. motor cable length, unscreened/unarmoured
Max. cross section to motor, mains, load sharing and brake *
Maximum cross section to control terminals, rigid wire
Maximum cross section to control terminals, flexible cable
Maximum cross section to control terminals, cable with enclosed core
Minimum cross section to control terminals
VLT HVAC Drive: 150 m

VLT HVAC Drive: 300 m
1.5 mm2/16 AWG (2 x 0.75 mm2)
1 mm2/18 AWG
0.5 mm2/20 AWG
0.25 mm2
* See Mains Supply tables for more information!

Digital inputs:
Programmable digital inputs
Terminal number
Logic
Voltage level
Voltage level, logic'0' PNP
Voltage level, logic'1' PNP
Voltage level, logic '0' NPN
Voltage level, logic '1' NPN
Maximum voltage on input
Input resistance, Ri
4 (6)
18, 19, 27 29 32, 33,
PNP or NPN
0 - 24 V DC
< 5 V DC
> 10 V DC
> 19 V DC
< 14 V DC
28 V DC
approx. 4 k
1),
All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
1) Terminals 27 and 29 can also be programmed as output.
140
1),
Specifications
Analog inputs:
Number of analog inputs
Terminal number
Modes
Mode select
Voltage mode
Voltage level
Max. voltage
Current mode
Current level
Max. current
Resolution for analog inputs
Accuracy of analog inputs
Bandwidth
2
53, 54
Voltage or current
Switch S201 and switch S202
Switch S201/switch S202 = OFF (U)
: 0 to + 10 V (scaleable)
approx. 10 k
20 V
Switch S201/switch S202 = ON (I)
0/4 to 20 mA (scaleable)
approx. 200
30 mA
10 bit (+ sign)
Max. error 0.5% of full scale
: 200 Hz
The analog inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
9 9
Pulse inputs:
Programmable pulse inputs
Terminal number pulse
Max. frequency at terminal, 29, 33
Max. frequency at terminal, 29, 33
Min. frequency at terminal 29, 33
Voltage level
Maximum voltage on input
Pulse input accuracy (0.1 - 1 kHz)
Analog output:
Number of programmable analog outputs
Terminal number
Current range at analog output
Max. resistor load to common at analog output
Accuracy on analog output
Resolution on analog output
2
29, 33
110 kHz (Push-pull driven)
5 kHz (open collector)
4 Hz
see section on Digital input
28 V DC
approx. 4 k
Max. error: 0.1% of full scale
1
42
0/4 - 20 mA
500
Max. error: 0.8 % of full scale
8 bit
The analog output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control card, RS-485 serial communication:
Terminal number
Terminal number 61
68 (P,TX+, RX+), 69 (N,TX-, RX-)

Common for terminals 68 and 69
The RS-485 serial communication circuit is functionally seated from other central circuits and galvanically isolated from the supply
voltage (PELV).
141
9 9
Specifications
Digital output:
Programmable digital/pulse outputs
Terminal number
Voltage level at digital/frequency output
Max. output current (sink or source)
Max. load at frequency output
Max. capacitive load at frequency output
Minimum output frequency at frequency output
Maximum output frequency at frequency output
Accuracy of frequency output
Resolution of frequency outputs
2
1)
27, 29
0 - 24 V
40 mA
1 k
10 nF
0 Hz
32 kHz
Max. error: 0.1 % of full scale
12 bit
1) Terminal 27 and 29 can also be programmed as input.

The digital output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control card, 24 V DC output:
Terminal number
Max. load
12, 13
: 200 mA
The 24 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV), but has the same potential as the analog and digital
inputs and outputs.
Relay outputs:
Programmable relay outputs
Relay 01 Terminal number
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO) (Resistive load)
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) (Inductive load @ cos 0.4)
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 1-2 (NO), 1-3 (NC) (Resistive load)
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) (Inductive load)
Relay 02 Terminal number
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load)2)3)
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load @ cos 0.4)
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load)
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load)
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Resistive load)
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Inductive load @ cos 0.4)
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Resistive load)
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Inductive load)
Min. terminal load on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO), 4-6 (NC), 4-5 (NO)
Environment according to EN 60664-1
2
1-3 (break), 1-2 (make)
240 V AC, 2 A
240 V AC, 0.2 A
60 V DC, 1A
24 V DC, 0.1A
4-6 (break), 4-5 (make)
400 V AC, 2 A
240 V AC, 0.2 A
80 V DC, 2 A
24 V DC, 0.1A
240 V AC, 2 A
240 V AC, 0.2A
50 V DC, 2 A
24 V DC, 0.1 A
24 V DC 10 mA, 24 V AC 20 mA
overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2
1) IEC 60947 t 4 and 5

The relay contacts are galvanically isolated from the rest of the circuit by reinforced isolation (PELV).
2) Overvoltage Category II
3) UL applications 300 V AC 2A
Control card, 10 V DC output:
Terminal number
Output voltage
Max. load
50
10.5 V 0.5 V
25 mA
The 10 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control characteristics:
Resolution of output frequency at 0 - 1000 Hz
System response time (terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33)
Speed control range (open loop)
Speed accuracy (open loop)
: +/- 0.003 Hz
: 2 ms
1:100 of synchronous speed
30 - 4000 rpm: Maximum error of 8 rpm
All control characteristics are based on a 4-pole asynchronous motor
142
Specifications
Surroundings:
Enclosure type A
IP 20/Chassis, IP 21kit/Type 1, IP55/Type12, IP 66/Type12
Enclosure type B1/B2
IP 21/Type 1, IP55/Type12, IP 66/12
Enclosure type B3/B4
IP20/Chassis
Enclosure type C1/C2
IP 21/Type 1, IP55/Type 12, IP66/12
Enclosure type C3/C4
IP20/Chassis
Enclosure type D1/D2/E1
IP21/Type 1, IP54/Type12
Enclosure type D3/D4/E2
IP00/Chassis
Enclosure type F1/F3
IP21, 54/Type1, 12
Enclosure type F2/F4
IP21, 54/Type1, 12
IP21/NEMA 1/IP 4X on top of enclosure
Enclosure kit available enclosure type D
Vibration test enclosure A, B, C
1.0 g
Vibration test enclosure D, E, F
0.7 g
Relative humidity
5% - 95% (IEC 721-3-3; Class 3K3 (non-condensing) during operation
Aggressive environment (IEC 60068-2-43) H2S test
class Kd
Test method according to IEC 60068-2-43 H2S (10 days)
Ambient temperature (at 60 AVM switching mode)
- with derating
max. 55 C1)
- with full output power of typical EFF2 motors (up to 90% output current)
- at full continuous FC output current
1)
max. 50 C1)
max. 45 C1)
For more information on derating see the Design Guide, section on Special Conditions.
Minimum ambient temperature during full-scale operation

Minimum ambient temperature at reduced performance
Temperature during storage/transport
Maximum altitude above sea level without derating
Maximum altitude above sea level with derating
0 C
- 10 C
-25 - +65/70 C
1000 m
3000 m
Derating for high altitude, see section on special conditions

EMC standards, Emission
EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-3/4, EN 55011, IEC 61800-3

EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-1/2,
EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6
EMC standards, Immunity

See section on special conditions!
Control card performance:
Scan interval
Control card, USB serial communication:
USB standard
USB plug
: 5 ms
1.1 (Full speed)
USB type B device plug
CAUTION!
Connection to PC is carried out via a standard host/
device USB cable.
The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the
supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
The USB connection is not galvanically isolated from
protection earth. Use only isolated laptop/PC as connection to the USB connector on frequency converter or an
isolated USB cable/converter.
143
9 9
Specifications
Protection and Features:
Electronic thermal motor protection against overload.
The frequency converter is protected against short-circuits on motor terminals U, V, W.
The frequency converter is protected against earth faults on motor terminals U, V, W.
Temperature monitoring of the heatsink ensures that the frequency converter trips if the temperature reaches 95 C
5C. An overload temperature cannot be reset until the temperature of the heatsink is below 70 C 5C (Guideline these temperatures may vary for different power sizes, enclosures etc.). The frequency converter has an auto derating
function to avoid it's heatsink reaching 95 deg C.
If a mains phase is missing, the frequency converter trips or issues a warning (depending on the load).
Monitoring of the intermediate circuit voltage ensures that the frequency converter trips if the intermediate circuit
voltage is too low or too high.
9 9
144
Specifications
Below 1000 m altitude no derating is necessary but above

1000 m the ambient temperature (TAMB) or max. output
current (Iout) should be derated in accordance with the shown
diagram.
9.2 Special Conditions

9.2.1 Purpose of Derating
Derating must be taken into account when using the frequency converter at low air pressure (heights), at low speeds, with
long motor cables, cables with a large cross section or at high
ambient temperature. The required action is described in this
section.
9.2.2 Derating for Ambient Temperature

90% frequency converter output current can be maintained
up to max. 50 C ambient temperature.
With a typical full load current of EFF 2 motors, full output
shaft power can be maintained up to 50 C.
For more specific data and/or derating information for other
motors or conditions, please contact Danfoss.
9.2.3 Automatic Adaptations to Ensure

Performance
The frequency converter constantly checks for critical levels of
internal temperature, load current, high voltage on the
intermediate circuit and low motor speeds. As a response to a
critical level, the frequency converter can adjust the switching
frequency and / or change the switching pattern in order to
ensure the performance of the frequency converter. The
capability to automatically reduce the output current extends
the acceptable operating conditions even further.
Illustration 9.1: Derating of output current versus altitude

at TAMB, MAX for frame sizes A, B and C. At altitudes above 2
An alternative is to lower the ambient temperature at high

altitudes and thereby ensure 100% output current at high
altitudes. As an example of how to read the graph, the
situation at 2 km is elaborated. At a temperature of 45 C (TAMB,
MAX - 3.3 K), 91% of the rated output current is available. At a
temperature of 41.7 C, 100% of the rated output current is
available.
9.2.4 Derating for Low Air Pressure

The cooling capability of air is decreased at lower air pressure.
Derating of output current versus altitude at TAMB, MAX for frame sizes D, E and F.
145
9 9
Specifications
9.2.5 Derating for Running at Low Speed

When a motor is connected to a frequency converter, it is
necessary to check that the cooling of the motor is adequate.
The level of heating depends on the load on the motor, as well
as the operating speed and time.
Constant torque applications (CT mode)
A problem may occur at low RPM values in constant torque
applications. In a constant torque application s a motor may
over-heat at low speeds due to less cooling air from the motor
integral fan.
Therefore, if the motor is to be run continuously at an RPM
value lower than half of the rated value, the motor must be
supplied with additional air-cooling (or a motor designed for
this type of operation may be used).
An alternative is to reduce the load level of the motor by

choosing a larger motor. However, the design of the frequency converter puts a limit to the motor size.
Variable (Quadratic) torque applications (VT)
In VT applications such as centrifugal pumps and fans, where
the torque is proportional to the square of the speed and the
power is proportional to the cube of the speed, there is no
need for additional cooling or de-rating of the motor.
In the graphs shown below, the typical VT curve is below the
maximum torque with de-rating and maximum torque with
forced cooling at all speeds.
Maximum load for a standard motor at 40 C driven by a frequency converter type VLT FCxxx
9 9
Legend: Typical torque at VT load Max torque with forced cooling Max torque
Note 1) Over-syncronous speed operation will result in the available motor torque decreasing inversely proportional with the increase in
speed. This must be considered during the design phase to avoid over-loading of the motor.
146
Index
Dc Bus Connection
Index
Dc Hold/preheat Current 2-00

Dc Link
Default Settings
A
Abbreviations And Standards
Ac Brake Max. Current 2-16
73
Acceleration Time
75
Access To Control Terminals
41
Accessory Bags
17
Alarm/warning Code List
125
Alarms And Warnings
123
Ama
50, 53
Analog Inputs
141
Analog Output
141
Application Examples
52
Auto Energy Optimization Compressor
69
Auto Energy Optimization Vt
70
Auto Tune
45
Automatic Adaptations To Ensure Performance

Automatic Motor Adaptation
Automatic Motor Adaptation (ama)
Awg
134
37
Brake Function 2-10
73
Branch Circuit Protection
145
Derating For Low Air Pressure
145
Derating For Running At Low Speed
146
Digital Inputs:
140
Digital Output
141
Display Line 1.1 Small 0-20
65
Display Text 1 0-37
68
Display Text 2 0-38
68
Display Text 3 0-39
68
Disposal Instruction
13
Dry Pump Delay 22-27
90
Dry Pump Function 22-26
90
Dst/summertime 0-74
69
Dst/summertime End 0-77
69
Dst/summertime Start 0-76
69
22
E
Earthing And It Mains
25
21
Electrical Ratings
10
Electronic Waste
13
Example Of Changing Parameter Data
47
Broken Belt Delay 22-62
91
Broken Belt Function 22-60
91
Fault Messages
Broken Belt Torque 22-61
91
Feedback 1 Conversion 20-01
C
140
10
Changes Made
47
Changing A Group Of Numeric Data Values
64
Changing A Text Value
64
Changing Data
64
Changing Of Data Value
64
Changing Parameter Data
47
Checklist
14
Closed Loop Type 20-70
87
Coast Inverse
48
Coasting
57
Commissioning
47
Communication Option
Configuration Mode 1-00
Constant Torque Applications (ct Mode)
Control Cables
Control Cables
51
Derating For Ambient Temperature
53
45, 71
Brake Connection Option
Caution
73
127
145
Cable Lengths And Cross Sections
36
130
69
146
127
83
Feedback 1 Source 20-00
83
Feedback 1 Source Unit 20-02
83
84
84
85
84
Feedback Function 20-20
85
Final Optimisation And Test
45
Fire Mode Live Zero Timeout Function 6-02
79
Flow At Design Point 22-89
93
Flow At Rated Speed 22-90
93
Flow Compensation 22-80
92
Flying Start 1-73
71
Frequency Converter
45
Frequency Converter Identification
Function At Stop 1-80
71
Function Relay 5-40
78
Function Set-ups
60
Fuses
22
22
21
Control Card Performance
143
Control Card, 10 V Dc Output
142
General Specifications
Control Card, 24 V Dc Output
142
General Warning.
Control Card, Rs-485 Serial Communication:
141
Glcp
50
Control Card, Usb Serial Communication:
143
Graphical Display
54
Control Characteristics
142
Control Terminals
Cooling
Cooling Conditions
Copyright, Limitation Of Liability And Revision Rights
41
72, 146
18
4
D
Date And Time 0-70
69
Date Format 0-71
69
140
9
H
High Power Series Mains And Motor Connections
High-voltage Warning
20
9
How To Connect A Pc To The Frequency Converter
49
How To Connect Motor - Introduction
31
How To Connect To Mains And Earthing For B1 And B2
28
How To Operate Graphical (glcp)
54
147
Index
Motor Speed Direction 4-10
75
[Motor Speed High Limit Hz] 4-14
76
[Motor Speed High Limit Rpm] 4-13
76
Indexed Parameters
64
[Motor Speed Low Limit Hz] 4-12
75
Indicator Lights (leds)
55
[Motor Speed Low Limit Rpm] 4-11
75
Initialisation
51
Motor Thermal Protection 1-90
72
Installation At High Altitudes
10
Motor Voltage 1-22
70
Installation At High Altitudes (pelv)
11
Motor Wiring Overview
32
Interval Between Starts 22-76
91
Name Plate Data
45
[Jog Speed Hz] 3-11
74
Name Plate Data.
45
[Jog Speed Rpm] 3-19
75
Nlcp
58
No Operation
48
No-flow Delay 22-24
90
K
Kty Sensor
128
No-flow Function 22-23
89
Non-ul Fuses 200 V To 480 V
23
Language 0-01
65
Output Performance (u, V, W)
Language Package 1
65
Over-current Protection
22
Language Package 2
65
Over-voltage Control 2-17
73
Lcp 102
54
Leds
54
Literature
140
Live Zero Timeout Function 6-01
79
Panel Through Mounting
19
Loggings
47
Parameter Data
47
Low Power Auto Set-up 22-20
89
Parameter Set-up
94
Low Power Detection 22-21
89
Pc Software Tools
49
Low Speed Detection 22-22
89
Pelv
11
Pid Autotuning 20-79
88
Pid Integral Time 20-94
89
Pid Normal/ Inverse Control 20-81
88
88
Main Menu
96
Pid Output Change 20-72
Main Menu Mode
56
Pid Performance 20-71
88
Main Menu Mode
63
Pid Proportional Gain 20-93
88
Main Reactance
71
[Pid Start Speed Hz] 20-83
88
Mains Connection For A2 And A3
27
[Pid Start Speed Rpm] 20-82
88
Mains Connection For B1, B2 And B3
28
Preset Reference 3-10
74
Mains Connection For B4, C1 And C2
29
Pressure At No-flow Speed 22-87
93
Mains Connection For C3 And C4
30
Pressure At Rated Speed 22-88
93
Mains Supply
Mains Wiring Overview
134, 138
Profibus Dp-v1
49
26
Protection And Features
144
Maximum Boost Time 22-46
91
Pulse Inputs
141
Maximum Feedback Level 20-74
88
Pulse Start/stop
Maximum Reference 3-03
74
Maximum Reference/feedb. 20-14
85
Mct 10
49
Mechanical Dimensions
16
Quick Menu
Mechanical Mounting
18
Quick Menu Mode
56
Minimum Feedback Level 20-73
88
Quick Menu Mode
47
Minimum Reference 3-02
73
Quick Transfer Of Parameter Settings When Using Glcp
50
Minimum Reference/feedb. 20-13
85
Minimum Run Time 22-40
90, 92
52
56, 96
Minimum Sleep Time 22-41
90
Motor Connection For C3 And C4
35
Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time 3-42
75
Motor Current 1-24
70
Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time 3-41
75
Motor Frequency 1-23
70
Reference 1 Source 3-15
74
Motor Name Plate
45
Reference 2 Source 3-16
75
70
Relay Connection
38
Motor Nominal Speed 1-25
140
Relay Output
40
Motor Parameters
53
Relay Outputs
142
[Motor Power Hp] 1-21
70
[Motor Power Kw] 1-20
70
Motor Output
Motor Protection
Motor Rotation Check 1-28
148
Rs-485 Bus Connection
72, 144
70
48
Index
S
Safe Stop Of The Frequency Converter
Safety Note
Safety Regulations
Safety Requirements Of Mechanical Installation
U
11
9
Ul Fuses, 200 - 240 V
24
Usb Connection.
41
9
19
Screened/armoured.
22
Semi-auto Bypass Set-up 4-64
76
Variable (quadratic) Torque Applications (vt)
146
Voltage Level
140
Serial Communication
Setpoint 1 20-21
143
87
Setpoint 2 20-22
87
Setpoint Boost 22-45
91
Short Cycle Protection 22-75
91
Side-by-side Installation
18
Sine-wave Filter
31
Software Version
[Speed At Design Point Hz] 22-86
93
[Speed At Design Point Rpm] 22-85
93
[Speed At No-flow Hz] 22-84
93
[Speed At No-flow Rpm] 22-83
93
Square-linear Curve Approximation 22-81
92
Start Delay 1-71
71
Start/stop
52
Stator Leakage Reactance
71
Status
56
Status Messages
54
Step-by-step
64
Surroundings:
143
Switches S201, S202, And S801
44
Switching Frequency 14-01
82
W
Wake-up Ref./fb Difference 22-44
91
[Wake-up Speed Hz] 22-43
90
[Wake-up Speed Rpm] 22-42
90
Warning Against Unintended Start
10
Warning Feedback High 4-57
76
Warning Feedback Low 4-56
76
Warning Speed High 4-53
76
Wiring Example And Testing
35
Work Point Calculation 22-82
92
T
Terminal 27 Digital Input 5-12
77
Terminal 27 Mode 5-01
77
Terminal 29 Digital Input 5-13
77
Terminal 29 Mode 5-02
77
Terminal 42 Output 6-50
81
Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 6-52
82
Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 6-51
81
Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 6-16
80
Terminal 53 High Current 6-13
80
Terminal 53 High Ref./feedb. Value 6-15
80
Terminal 53 High Voltage 6-11
79
Terminal 53 Live Zero 6-17
80
Terminal 53 Low Current 6-12
80
Terminal 53 Low Ref./feedb. Value 6-14
80
Terminal 53 Low Voltage 6-10
79
Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 6-26
81
Terminal 54 High Current 6-23
80
Terminal 54 High Ref./feedb. Value 6-25
80
Terminal 54 High Voltage 6-21
80
Terminal 54 Live Zero 6-27
81
Terminal 54 Low Current 6-22
80
Terminal 54 Low Ref./feedb. Value 6-24
80
Terminal 54 Low Voltage 6-20
80
Thermistor
72
Thermistor Source 1-93
73
Three Ways Of Operating
54
Tightening Of Terminals
20
Time Format 0-72

Torque Characteristics 1-03
69
69, 140
[Trip Speed Low Hz] 1-87
72
[Trip Speed Low Rpm] 1-86
72
Type Code String (t/c)
Type Code String Low And Medium Power
149

Danfoss VLT HVAC FC100 Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Danfoss VLT HVAC FC100 Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

VLT HVAC Drive Operating Instructions

1.1.1 Copyright, Limitation of Liability and Revision Rights

2.1.2 High Voltage Warning

2.1.4 Before Commencing Repair Work

2.1.5 Special Conditions

2.1.7 Avoid Unintended Start

2.1.8 Safe Stop of the Frequency Converter

3.1 Before Starting

3.2.2 Mechanical Dimensions

4.1 How to Connect

4.1.2 Electrical Installation and Control Cables

4.1.5 Mains Wiring Overview

4.1.12 Motor Wiring Overview

4.1.20 DC Bus Connection

4.1.21 Brake Connection Option

4.1.22 Relay Connection

4.1.26 How to Test Motor and Direction of Rotation

5 Commissioning and Application Examples

5.1.1 Quick Menu Mode

5.1.5 Tips and Tricks

5.2 Application Examples

5.2.2 Pulse Start/Stop

5.2.3 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

6 How to Operate the Frequency Converter

6.1.2 How to Operate Graphical LCP (GLCP)

6.1.3 How to Operate Numeric LCP (NLCP)

7 How to Programme the Frequency Converter

7.1 How to Programme

7.1.1 Function Set-ups

MG.11.AD.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

VLT HVAC Drive Operating Instructions

7.2 Commonly Used Parameters - Explanations

7.3.2 0-** Operation and Display

7.3.3 1-** Load / Motor

7.3.4 2-** Brakes

7.3.5 3-** Reference / Ramps

7.3.6 4-** Limits / Warnings

7.3.7 5-** Digital In / Out

7.3.8 6-** Analog In / Out

7.3.9 8-** Communication and Options

7.3.10 9-** Profibus

7.3.11 10-** CAN Fieldbus

7.3.12 11-** LonWorks

7.3.13 13-** Smart Logic Controller

7.3.14 14-** Special Functions

7.3.15 15-** Drive Information

7.3.16 16-** Data Readouts

7.3.17 18-** Info & Readouts

7.3.18 20-** FC Closed Loop

7.3.19 21-** Ext. Closed Loop

7.3.20 22-** Application Functions

7.3.21 23-** Time Based Funtions

7.3.22 24-** Application Functions 2

7.3.23 25-** Cascade Pack Controller

7.3.24 26-** Analog I / O Option MCB 109

8.1 Alarms and Warnings

8.1.1 Fault Messages

8.2 Acoustic Noise or Vibration

9.1 General Specifications

9.2 Special Conditions

MG.11.AD.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

VLT HVAC Drive Operating Instructions